Skip to main content

Full text of "Review of research in visual and environmental education"

See other formats


. 


which  it  was  withVi  the  ,lbrary  from 

Tli.b       ..       . 


L161— O-1096 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2011  with  funding  from 

University  of  Illinois  Urbana-Champaign 


http://www.archive.org/details/reviewofresearch15univ 


eview  of  Research  in  Visual  Arts  Education 


m    \ 


Winter  1982 


Editorial  Consultants 


Bette  Acuff 

Columbia  University 

Robin  Alexander 

University  of  Texas 

Brian  Allison 

Leicester  Polytechnic,  G.  B. 

Kenneth  R.  Beittel 

Pennsylvania  State  University 

Ginny  Brouch 

Florida  State  University 

F.  Graeme  Chalmers 

University  of  British  Columbia 

Gilbert  Clark 

Indiana  University 

Robert  D.  Clements 

University  of  Georgia 

Vesta  A.  H.  Daniel 

Northern  Illinois  University 

Michael  Day 

University  of  Minnesota 

Helen  Diemert 

University  of  Calgary 

Rex  Dorethy 

Ball  State  University 

Arthur  Efland 

Ohio  State  University 

Elliot  W.  Eisner 

Stanford  University 

Martin  Engel 

National  Institute  of  Education 

Barbara  Fredette 

University  of  Pittsburgh 

George  Geahigan 

Purdue  University 

Denise  Hickey 

Mackie  College,  Australia 

Guy  Hubbard 

Indiana  University 

Beverly  J.  Jones 

University  of  Oregon 

Larry  A.  Kantner 

University  of  Missouri-Columbia 

Hilda  P.  Lewis 

San  Francisco  State  University 

Douglas  Marschalek 

Miami  University 

H.  James  Marshall 

University  of  Illinois 

Clyde  McGeary 

Pennsylvania  Department  of  Education 

Harold  McWhinnie 

University  of  Maryland 


Jerry  W.  Morris 

Miami  University 

Ron  Neperud 

University  of  Wisconsin-Madison 

Ross  A.  Norris 

Ohio  State  University 

David  A.  Pariser 

Concordia  University 

Phil  E.  Phillips 

East  Carolina  University 

Gordon  Plummer 

University  of  Cincinnati 

Charles  A.  Qualley 

University  of  Colorado 

Max  Rennels 

Illinois  State  University 

Eric  E.  Rump 

University  of  Adelaide.  Aus. 

Jean  C.  Rush 

University  of  Arizona 

Elizabeth  J.  Sacca 

Concordia  University-Montreal.  Can. 

Richard  Salome 

Illinois  State  University 

Robert  J.  Saunders 

Connecticut  Department  of  Education 

Bernard  Schwartz 

University  of  Alberta,  Can. 

Maurice  J.  Sevigny 

Bowling  Green  State  University 

Ralph  A.  Smith 

University  of  Illinois 

Mary  Ann  Stankiewicz 

University  of  Maine  at  Orono 

Martha  Taunton 

University  of  Iowa 

Anne  Taylor 

University  of  New  Mexico 

James  Victoria 

Michigan  State  University 

Brent  Wilson 

Pennsylvania  State  University 

Marjorie  Wilson 

Pennsylvania  Furnace 

James  Wright 

Virginia  Commonwealth  University 

Foster  Wygant 

University  of  Cincinnati 

Michael  Youngblood 

Southern  Illinois  University 

Marilyn  Zurmuehlen 

University  of  Iowa 


Review  of  Research  in  Visual  Arts  Education 

Proceedings  of  The  National  Symposium  for 

Research  in  Art 

Learning  in  Art:  Representation  and  Metaphor 


Winter  1982 


Number  15 


Editors 


Editorial  Board 


George  W.  Hardiman 
Theodore  Zernich 

School  of  Art  and  Design 
University  of  Illinois 
Champaign,  Illinois 


Laura  H.  Chapman 

Cincinnati,  Ohio 

Dennis  A.  Dahl 

University  of  Illinois 


Edmund  B.  Feldman 

University  of  Georgia 

Howard  Gardner 

Harvard  University 

Jessie  Lovano-Kerr 

Indiana  University 


June  King  McFee 

University  of  Oregon 


Editorial  Associates 

Jane  C.  Maitland-Gholson 

Alice  Arnold 

Birdie  Cooper 

Carol  Fisher 

Ahmad  Hashim 

Andra  Johnson 

Marilyn  Munski 


The  Review  of  Research  in  Visual  Arts 
Education  is  published  twice  yearly 
(fall  and  winter)  by  the  Office  of  Con- 
tinuing Education  and  Public  Service 
and  the  Department  of  Art  and  Design, 
University  of  Illinois,  Urbana,  Illinois 
61801.  Subscriptions  are  $10.00  for  one 
year;  single  issues  are  $6.00.  Checks 
and  money  orders  should  be  made  pay- 
able to  the  University  of  Illinois.  Pay- 
ment must  be  enclosed.  Mail  remit- 
tance to: 

Editorial  Office 
143  Art  and  Design  Building 
4th  St.  and  Peabody  Drive 
University  of  Illinois 
Champaign,  Illinois  61820 

Second-class   postage   approved   at 
Urbana,  Illinois. 

©  Review  of  Research  in  Visual  Arts 
Education,  1981 


Contents 


Articles 

The  Persistence  of  the 
Perpendicular  Principle:  Why, 
When  and  Where  Inate  Factors 
Determine  the  Nature  of  Drawings 

Brent  Wilson  and  Marjorie  Wilson  ...  .1 

The  Case  of  the  Disappearing 
Two-Eyed  Profile:  Or  How  Little 
Children  Influence  the  Drawings 
of  Little  Children 

Marjorie  Wilson  and  Brent  Wilson  .  .  .19 

Correspondence  Between  Implied 
Points  of  View  and  Selected 
Points  of  View  in  Children's 
Drawings  of  Familiar  and 
Unfamiliar  Objects 
James  Victoria 33 


Compositional  Design  as  a 
Perceptual  Determinant  of 
Aesthetic  Judgment 

Calvin  F.  Nodine 


Children's  Comprehension  of 
Photographic  Representation 

Harry  Beilin 


.43 


55 


Project  Zero:  The  Evolution  of 
Visual  Arts  Research  During 
the  Seventies 

Jessie  Lovano-Kerr  and  Jean  Rush  .  .61 

Response  to  Comment  on 
Project  Zero  by  Jessie  Lovano- 
Kerr  and  Jean  Rush 

Howard  Gardner 82 


THE  PERSISTENCE  OF  THE  PERPENDICULAR  PRINCIPLE:  WHY,  WHEN  AND 
WHERE  INNATE  FACTORS  DETERMINE  THE  NATURE  OF  DRAWINGS 


Brent  Wilson 
Marjorie  Wilson 


Introduction 

We  thought  we  saw  a  foolish  cow 

Standing  on  her  head 

We  looked  again  and  saw  her 

Perpendicular  instead 

"We  wonder  why,"  we  were  heard  to  cry, 

"To  this  muddle  she  was  led." 

(with  apologies  to  Lewis  Carroll) 

The  aforementioned  cow  is  only  one 
of  sixteen  that  cling  tenaciously  at 
right  angles  to  a  mountain  path,  re- 
gardless of  whether  the  path  slopes 
gently  upward  or  plunges  downward 
and  turns  at  such  extreme  angles  that 
our  cow  does  appear  to  be  hanging 
head  down,  while  another  adheres  to 
the  path's  underside  as  a  fly  clings  to 
a  rafter.  The  path,  the  mountain,  a  dog, 
two  people  and  the  sixteen  perpen- 
dicularly attached  cows  appear  in  a 
drawing  reproduced  in  Henry  Schaefer- 
Simmern's  The  Unfolding  of  Artistic 
Activity  (1948).  The  drawing  is  one  of 
a  series  by  Miss  "E,"  a  33-year-old 
woman  whose  perpendicular  orienta- 
tion of  objects  to  a  baseline  Schaefer- 
Simmern  attributes  to  a  stage  of  visual 
conceiving  —  the  stage  of  the  great- 
est contrast  in  direction  of  lines.  He 
notes,  however,  that  the  illusion  of  dis- 
tance shown  by  the  gradual  diminu- 
tion in  the  size  of  the  cows  from  the 
lower  to  the  upper  parts  of  the  drawing 
is  based  upon  the  woman's  "spontane- 
ous visual  experience"  (Schaefer-Sim- 
mern,  1948,  pp.  131-141).  Schaefer- 
Simmern  expresses  concern  that  there 
might  seem  to  be  an  inconsistency  be- 
tween the  perpendicular-to-the-base- 
line  orientation  of  the  cows  and  their 
diminution  in  size,  contradicting  his 
assertion  that  "the  unity  of  form  is  an 


essential  characteristic  of  any  organi- 
cally developing  process  of  visual  con- 
figuration" (Schaefer-Simmern,  1948, 
p.  138).  Something,  it  seems,  was 
muddying  Schaefer-Simmern's  explan- 
atory waters.  For  Schaefer-Simmern 
and,  we  might  add,  for  many  others, 
"artistic  unfolding"  is  entirely  an  in- 
nate and  organic  process — indeed  it 
is  believed  that  in  order  for  the  process 
to  be  properly  achieved  it  should  be 
—  it  must  be  —  natural  and  unfettered. 
No  piece  of  evidence,  however  incon- 
sistent, has  been  allowed  to  interfere 
with  his  beliefs. 

The  confusion  of  Schaefer-Simmern 
and  others  between  what  they  wish  to 
be  the  case  and  what  is  actually  the 
case,  leads  to  the  systematic  disregard 
for  some  aspects  of  graphic  develop- 
ment and  the  exaggeration  of  others. 
If  we  are  to  understand  graphic  devel- 
opment it  seems  necessary  to  take  a 
more  rigorous  and  careful  look  at  the 
full  range  of  factors  that  affect  this 
development.  As  the  path  to  that  under- 
standing we  have  chosen  to  begin  with 
Miss  "E's"  curious  gravity-defying  per- 
pendicularly-oriented cows. 


This  investigation  was  supported  in  part  by 
a  grant  from  The  Institute  for  the  Arts  and 
Humanistic  Studies  at  The  Pennsylvania 
State  University. 

The  authors  wish  to  recognize  the  assis- 
tance of  Barbara  Roberts  in  collecting  the 
data,  Ralph  Raunft  and  Ken  Bojrab  in  scor- 
ing the  data  and  Jon  Lemke  in  the  statisti- 
cal analysis  of  the  data. 
Additional  unpublished  graphic  materials 
supporting  this  research  are  available  from 
the  editorial  office  of  the  Review  of  Research 
in  Visual  Arts  Education. 


Figure  1.  "Taking  the  Cows  Home  from  the  Hill."  Collected  by  Schaefer-Simmern. 


Schaefer-Simmern  reports  that, 
sometime  after  drawing  her  upside- 
down  cows,  Miss  "E"  drew  cows  on 
horizontal  baselines  because,  she 
wrote  "no  longer  wishing  to  see  the 
cows  coming  downhill  at  such  awk- 
ward angles,  I  had  to  draw  a  serpentine 
pathway  which  gave  me  the  opportu- 
nity of  placing  all  the  cows  right-side- 
up"  (Schaefer-Simmern,  1948,  p.  139). 
We  wish  to  raise  the  specific  question 
"What  led  Miss  E'  to  subject  her  cows 
to  the  laws  of  gravity  rather  than  to 
those  of  innate  graphic  order?";  and 
from  this  specific  question  we  will 
raise  the  whole  issue  of  the  interplay 
of  nature  and  nurture  in  graphic  de- 
velopment. 

The  Nature  of  Innate  Theories 
of  Graphic  Development 

Nearly  all  theories  of  drawing  develop- 
ment are  predicated  on  the  single  as- 
sumption that  the  unfolding  of  graphic 
achievement  is  determined  by  the 
child's  stage-by-stage  application  of 
a  series  of  innate  factors  or  rules. 


These  factors  have  not  been  set  down 
in  one  place  or  integrated  into  one 
comprehensive  theory;  rather  they 
have  been  identified  singly  or  in  small 
clusters  by  psychologists,  art  educa- 
tors and  others  interested  in  artistic 
development.  Among  the  rules  are: 
(1)  keep  shapes  undifferentiated  and 
simple  for  as  long  as  possible  while 
still  achieving  graphic  goals  (Arn- 
heim,  1974,  p.  181);  (2)  achieve  the 
greatest  possible  contrast  of  lines, 
often  through  a  horizontal/vertical 
orientation  (Schaefer-Simmern,  1948, 
pp.  11-21);  (3)  orient  objects  in  a  per- 
pendicular fashion  to  the  nearest  base- 
line (Piaget  and  Inhelder,  1956,  pp. 
375-417);  (4)  end-anchor  and  attach 
limbs  to  the  largest  mass  (Freeman, 
1975);  (5)  depict  conceived  as  well  as 
perceived  information  (Luquet,  1913, 
1927);  and  (6)  avoid  overlap  and  pro- 
vide each  object  with  its  own  space 
(Goodnow,  1977,  pp.  40-46).  It  is  inter- 
esting to  note  in  passing  that  most  art 
educators  writing  on  children's  art 
have  been  content  to  describe  the 
characteristics  of  age-based  develop- 


B.  Wilson,  M.  Wilson 


mental  stages,  but  they  have  generally 
eschewed  the  explanatory  power  af- 
forded by  the  innate  rules. 

Although  explanations  of  graphic 
development  arising  from  these  and 
other  innate  rules  and  factors  have 
not  been  extended  to  their  logical 
conclusions,  we  might  expect  that  ex- 
tensions in  which  development  pro- 
ceeds from  a  lower  to  a  higher  level 
would  take  one  or  more  of  the  follow- 
ing forms:  (1)  innate  factors  have  struc- 
tures ranging  from  simple  to  complex 
through  which  the  child  moves  in  se- 
quence; (2)  a  more  advanced  form  of 
some  innate  factor  replaces  a  more 
basic  form  of  innate  factor;  (3)  one 
innate  factor  is  replaced  by  an  entirely 
different  factor;  or  (4)  the  range  of 
application  of  a  rule  is  increasingly 
more  restricted,  i.e.,  the  rule  is  applied 
less  and  less  generally.  Each  of  these 
explanations  assumes  the  graphic 
learner's  growing  cognitive  ability  to 
handle  increasing  complexity  and  his 
increasing  ability  to  note  discrepan- 
cies between  that  which  has  been 
drawn  and  that  which  has  been  per- 
ceived in  the  phenomenal  world.  Once 
noted,  these  discrepancies  presumably 
trigger  in  the  individual  the  desire  to 
reduce  the  discrepancy  by  inventing 
a  new  graphic  equivalent  for  the  phe- 
nomenal perception.  This,  in  turn,  de- 
mands a  different  or  higher  level  appli- 
cation of  one  or  more  innate  graphic 
factors.  This  would  seem  to  be  the  the- 
oretical concept  implicit  in  Schaefer- 
Simmern's  formulation.  Although  he 
recognizes  that  phenomenal  percep- 
tions alter  the  nature  of  drawings  and 
presumably  also  affect  the  application 
of  innate  factors,  this  point  seems  not 
to  have  been  fully  acknowledged  nor 
its  implications  investigated.  Much  the 
same  might  be  said  for  the  work  of 
Lowenfeld  (1963)  as  he  sees  the  child 
moving  from  the  scribbling  stages 
through  dawning  realism  and  the 
pseudo-realistic  stage.  Luquet  (1913 
and   1927)  too,  divided  development 


into  stages  including  those  of:  intel- 
lectual realism  where  the  younger  child 
applies  internal  graphic  factors  in  or- 
der to  draw  what  he  knows  about  things 
and  visual  realism  where  the  older 
child  draws  or  at  least  attempts  to  draw 
things  as  they  appear  to  him  in  the 
phenomenal  world.  In  these  and  other 
explanations  of  graphic  development 
it  is  not  clear  what  happens  to  the  in- 
nate factors  with  the  onset  of  visual 
realism  or  pseudo-realism.  Are  the 
innate  factors  gradually  but  finally  re- 
placed by  non-innate  graphic  factors? 
Or  do  the  innate  rules  continue  to  exist 
in  some  diminished  role  as  they  be- 
come submerged  or  overridden  by  new 
governing  factors?  It  seems  that  the 
strong  theoretical  reliance  on  the  pri- 
mary and  pervasive  role  of  the  innate 
rules  in  graphic  development  has  im- 
peded the  investigation  of  factors  other 
than  the  innate  which  might  determine 
the  nature  of  graphic  development.  In 
this  paper  we  propose  to  (1)  investi- 
gate the  nature  of  both  the  innate  and 
non-innate  principles  that  affect 
graphic  development,  (2)  to  investi- 
gate the  nature  of  the  interaction  be- 
tween these  two  types  of  principles, 
and  (3)  to  investigate  the  conditions 
under  which  one  or  the  other  of  the 
principles  dominate. 


The  Study 

Miss  "E"  drew  the  path  for  her  cows. 
We  provided  a  hill  for  our  subjects  — 
one  with  a  slope  of  40  degrees  on 
either  side.  Subjects  were  asked  to 
draw  a  figure  walking  one-half  way  up 
one  side  of  the  hill  and  another  walk- 
ing one-half  way  down  the  other.  We 
observed  the  means  by  which  subjects 
of  different  ages  oriented  their  fig- 
ures to  the  baseline.  These  observa- 
tions, we  assumed,  would  provide  the 
basis  for  insights  into  whether  sub- 
jects' productions  were  governed  by 
an  innate  factor  or  by  some  other. 


Perpendicular  Principle:  Inate  Factors 


The  Subjects 


Statistical  Analysis 


Four  hundred  and  sixty-five  subjects 
participated  in  the  study.  The  subjects 
were  divided  into  four  groups:  the  first 
group  of  112  subjects  consisted  of  two 
five-year-olds,  83  six-year-olds  and  34 
seven-year-olds;  the  second  group  of 
123  subjects  consisted  of  85  eight- 
year-olds,  30  nine-year-olds  and  eight 
ten-year-olds;  the  third  group  of  82 
subjects  consisted  of  four  eleven-year- 
olds,  15  twelve-year-olds,  19  thirteen- 
year-olds  and  44  fourteen-year-olds; 
and  the  fourth  group  consisted  of  148 
young  adults  ranging  in  age  from  18  to 
36.  Approximately  one-half  of  the  sub- 
jects in  each  of  the  four  groups  came 
from  the  East  Central  region  of  the 
United  States  and  the  other  half  from 
the  Southeastern  region  of  the  United 
States. 


Scoring 

The  angle  of  both  up-hill  and  down- 
hill figures  in  each  drawing  was  ana- 
lyzed in  relation  to  the  angle  of  the 
hill  on  which  it  was  placed  and  to  the 
page  itself  by  (1)  measuring  the  num- 
ber of  degrees  by  which  a  figure 
departed  from  the  vertical  (a  figure 
parallel  to  the  side  of  the  page  and  per- 
pendicular to  the  bottom  of  the  page  or 
baseline  was  scored  as  zero  degrees, 
while  a  figure  that  was  perpendicular 
to  the  slope  of  the  hill  was  scored  as 
40  degrees);  by  (2)  indicating  whether 
the  figures  were  (a)  stick,  (b)  shown 
front-view,  profile,  or  mixed  profile 
and  front-view,  (c)  whether  the  legs 
were  straight  or  bent  and  (d)  whether 
the  legs  were  of  different  lengths;  and 
by  (3)  classifying  whether  (a)  two  feet 
were  on  the  surface  of  the  hill,  (b)  only 
one  foot  was  on  the  surface,  (c)  two 
feet  were  off  the  surface  of  the  hill, 
(d)  one  foot  was  below  the  surface  of 
the  hill,  (e)  and  whether  two  feet  were 
below  the  surface  of  the  hill. 


From  simple  plots  of  the  angle  of  the 
figures  in  relationship  to  the  other 
variables,  it  became  immediately  clear 
that  the  use  of  measures  of  central 
tendency  such  as  mean  and  median 
would  provide  either  few  or  distorted 
views  about  the  governing  role  of  the 
innate  perpendicular  factor  and  the 
non-innate  vertical  factor.  In  fact  not 
only  were  the  measures  of  central  ten- 
dency seen  to  have  little  value  but 
tests  used  to  compare  them  would  be 
inappropriate  since  the  distributions 
were  found  to  (1)  be  skewed  to  the  left 
(both  unimodally  and  bimodally)  where 
the  vertical  factor  governed,  (2)  skewed 
to  the  right  (both  unimodally  and  bi- 
modally) where  the  perpendicular  fac- 
tor governed,  (3)  symmetrical  where  a 
tension  between  the  perpendicular  and 
the  vertical  factors  were  heaviest  and 
(4)  symmetrical  but  bimodal  where 
both  the  perpendicular  and  vertical 
factors  governed  equally.  Since  the 
variances  of  the  distributions  were 
found  to  be  unequal,  it  became  neces- 
sary, in  order  to  discuss  the  governing 
role  of  the  perpendicular  and  vertical 
factors,  to  view  the  proportion  of  sub- 
jects that  were  governed  by  the  per- 
pendicular and  vertical  factors  as  well 
as  those  subject  to  the  tension  be- 
tween them.  Thus  subjects  who  ori- 
ented figures  between  -10  to  10  de- 
grees of  being  perpendicular  to  the 
base  of  the  hill  were  considered  to  be 
governed  by  the  vertical  factor;  sub- 
jects who  oriented  figures  11  to  29  de- 
grees from  the  vertical  were  consid- 
ered to  be  in  the  region  of  tension; 
and  subjects  who  oriented  figures  be- 
tween 30  to  50  degrees  from  the  verti- 
cal were  considered  to  be  governed 
by  the  perpendicular  factor.  Subjects 
orienting  figures  beyond  these  regions 
were  considered  outliers  and  were  ex- 
cluded from  further  analysis  because 
of  the  strong  distorting  influence  they 
would  have  had  on  the  measures. 


B.  Wilson,  M.  Wilson 


It  was  necessary  to  use  two  separate 
analyses,  one  for  the  figure  walking 
uphill  and  another  for  the  downhill 
figure  because  the  distributions  of  the 
two  angles  of  orientation  were  dis- 
tinctly different  (there  were,  for  exam- 
ple, more  bimodal  occurrences  for 
downhill  figures).  Indeed  the  two  tasks 
were  somewhat  unrelated,  as  the  data 
show.  For  example,  it  would  not  be 
possible  to  predict  the  type  of  surface 
contact  for  the  downhill  figure  on  the 
basis  of  the  surface  contact  of  the  up- 
hill figure,  nor  were  differences  in  leg 
length  predictable  from  downhill  to 
uphill  figures. 

In  an  initial  analysis  the  variables 
(1)  stick  figure,  (2)  front,  profile  and 
mixed  views,  and  (3)  the  sex  of  the 
subject  were  found  to  be  independent 
of  all  other  variables  or  conditionally 
independent  of  angle  and  were  there- 
fore eliminated  from  further  analysis. 
Instances  in  which  either  two  feet,  or 
only  one  foot  broke  the  surface  of  the 
hill  or  disappeared  behind  the  hill 
were  infrequent  and  were  pooled  into 
one  larger  category  of  breaking-the- 
surface.  Thus  the  initial  4032  cross- 
classifications  were  reduced  to  192. 

Finally,  although  the  tables  were 
still  sparse  the  displays  of  age  x  bent- 
legs  x  leg-length  x  surface  contact 
showed  that  the  huge  majority  of 
sparse  cells  occurred  when  the  legs 
were  bent.  The  bent-leg  variable  had 
a  very  complex  interaction  structure 
with  the  other  variables.  By  condition- 
ing the  variable  on  bent  legs  it  was 
found  that  figure-orientation  angle  was 
completely  independent  of  all  other 
variables.  This  separate  analysis  of 
bent  legs  had  important  theoretical 
implications  that  will  be  discussed 
later. 

The  analyses,  then,  were  made  to 
estimate  the  extent  to  which  the  per- 
pendicular and  vertical  factors  and 
the  tension  between  them  governed 
in  relation  to  the  age  of  the  subject, 
the  angle  of  figure  orientation,  whether 
legs  were  bent  or  lengthened  and  the 


nature  of  the  contact  with  the  surface 
of  the  hill. 

Findings 

Two  major  sets  of  findings  will  be  pre- 
sented. The  first  contains  estimates  of 
the  number  of  individuals  to  be  influ- 
enced by  the  perpendicular  factor 
when  the  legs  of  figures  are  not  bent, 
the  second  contains  estimates  of  the 
influence  when  legs  are  bent. 

Analysis  of  the  Figure-Baseline  Ori- 
entation When  Legs  Are  Not  Bent. 
Through  the  application  of  log-linear 
models  to  the  cross  classified  data  it 
was  found  that  the  response  variable 
an gle-of-figu re-orientation  interacted 
simultaneously  with  the  variable  of 
legs-of-different-lengths,  the  various 
types  of  contact  with  the  baseline  of 
the  hill,  and  with  the  age  of  the  sub- 
ject. The  appropriate  log-linear  model 
fit  to  the  data,  then,  contains  the  struc- 
tural third-order  interaction  of  age,  leg 
length  and  surface  contact;  the  sec- 
ond-order interaction  of  the  angle-of- 
orientation  with  leg  length  and  surface 
contact;  and  the  first-order  interaction 
of  the  response  angle  with  age.  Tables 
1  and  2  present  the  maximum  likeli- 
hood estimates  for  the  proportions 
that  fall  into  the  perpendicular,  verti- 
cal and  tension  angle  groupings  for 
each  of  the  32  cross-classifications. 

In  order  to  indicate  as  simply  as 
possible  just  what  these  tables  show 
we  shall  illustrate  the  data  by  present- 
ing examples  of  features  of  the  up-  and 
down-the-hill  drawings. 

Floating  Leg.  When  subjects  de- 
picted one  foot  on  the  hill  and  the 
other  floating  freely  (Figure  2)  there 
was  more  likelihood  that  the  figure 
would  be  in  the  vertical  or  tension  re- 
gions than  in  the  perpendicular  region 
for  both  uphill  and  downhill  figures. 
In  other  words,  although  the  govern- 
ing power  of  the  perpendicular  was 
present  especially  for  the  downhill 
figures,  the  one-foot-on-one-foot-off 
solution  seemed  to  be  quite  a  useful 


Perpendicular  Principle:  Inate  Factors 


TABLE  1 

Estimates  of  the  Maximum  Likelihood  That  Uphill  Figures  With  Unbent  Legs 

Will  Be  Oriented  in  the  Vertical,  Tension  and  Perpendicular  Regions 


Percentage 

Surface 

Leg  Length 

Group 

Vertical 

Tension 

Perpendicular 

One  Foot 

Legs  Same 

One 

43.88 

41.27 

14.85 

Off  Surface 

Length 

Two 

46.69 

42.40 

10.91 

Three 

41.73 

37.93 

20.33 

Four 

61.73 

27.00 

11.27 

Legs  Dif- 

One 

42.49 

30.86 

26.65 

ferent 

Two 

46.84 

32.87 

20.29 

Lengths 

Three 

38.38 

26.93 

34.69* 

Four 

59.64 

20.16 

20.20 

Two  Feet 

Legs  Same 

One 

30.25 

40.52 

29.23 

Off  Surface 

Length 

Two 

33.78 

43.69 

22.53 

Three 

27.12 

35.12 

37.76 

Four 

46.60 

29.08 

24.32 

Legs  Dif- 

One 

41.34 

31.49 

27.17 

ferent 

Two 

45.67 

33.60 

20.73 

Lengths 

Three 

32.27 

27.40 

35.33* 

Four 

58.50 

20.75 

20.75 

Foot  Breaks 

Legs  Same 

One 

41.32 

35.80 

22.88 

Surface 

Length 

Two 

45.06 

37.71 

17.23 

Three 

37.95 

31.76 

30.29 

Four 

58.74 

23.71 

17.56 

Legs  Dif- 

One 

49.22 

23.32 

27.46* 

ferent 

Two 

54.25 

24.84 

20.91 

Lengths 

Three 

44.22 

20.24 

35.55* 

Four 

65.70 

14.51 

19.79 

Two  Feet 

Legs  Same 

One 

9.36 

46.73 

43.91 

on  Surface 

Length 

Two 

11.04 

53.22 

35.75 

Three 

7.95 

38.33 

53.72 

Four 

17.07 

39.70 

43.23 

Legs  Dif- 

One 

54.68 

37.77 

7.54 

ferent 

Two 

56.74 

37.86 

5.41 

Lengths 

Three 

53.59 

35.76 

10.65 

Four 

71.62 

23.04 

5.33 

*  Bimodal  distributions;  higher  percentage  in  the  distribution  is  italicized. 


means  for  orienting  figures  toward 
the  vertical.  It  is  also  important  to 
note  that  three  of  the  four  distribu- 
tions for  downhill  figures  are  bimodal, 
indicating  that  there  was  a  tendency 
for  subjects  to  be  influenced  either  by 
the  vertical  or  the  perpendicular  for 
the  downhill  application  of  this  vari- 
able. It  appears  then  that  the  subjects 
had  implicitly  determined  which  polar 
extreme  would  govern  their  figure  ori- 


entation, thus  reducing  the  use  of  the 
tension  area  between  the  poles. 

The  depiction  of  legs  of  differing 
lengths  with  one  foot  off  the  surface 
would  appear  to  increase  the  likeli- 
hood of  subjects'  achieving  a  vertical 
figure  orientation,  yet  the  estimated 
proportions  are  very  much  like  those 
for  one-foot-off  with  legs  of  the  same 
length.  Perhaps  the  orientation  was 
established  and  the  leg  lengthened 


B.  Wilson,  M.  Wilson 


TABLE  2 

Estimates  of  the  Maximum  Likelihood  That  Downhill  Figures  With  Unbent  Legs 

Will  Be  Oriented  in  the  Vertical,  Tension  and  Perpendicular  Regions 


Percentage 

Surface 

Leg  Length 

Group 

Vertical 

Tension 

Perpendicular 

One  Foot 

Legs  Same 

One 

46.48 

26.09 

27.47* 

Off  Surface 

Length 

Two 

30.52 

32.46 

37.01 

Three 

47.18 

17.38 

35.44* 

Four 

61.00 

11.51 

27.49* 

Legs  Dif- 

One 

39.13 

29.76 

31.12* 

ferent 

Two 

24.57 

35.37 

40.05 

Lengths 

Three 

39.86 

19.88 

40.26* 

Four 

53.77 

13.73 

32.56* 

Two  Feet 

Legs  Same 

One 

34.39 

35.14 

30.47 

Off  Surface 

Length 

Two 

21.05 

40.72 

38.23 

Three 

35.78 

23.96 

40.25* 

Four 

49.52 

17.04 

33.44* 

Legs  Dif- 

One 

36.55 

56.74 

6.71 

ferent 

Two 

23.17 

68.09 

8.73 

Lengths 

Three 

44.42 

45.22 

10.37 

Four 

60.16 

31.40 

8.44 

Foot  Breaks 

Legs  Same 

One 

31.28 

43.91 

24.82 

Surface 

Length 

Two 

18.92 

50.30 

30.78 

Three 

34.15 

31.44 

34.42* 

Four 

48.16 

22.73 

29.11 

Legs  Dif- 

One 

57.57 

34.61 

7.82 

ferent 

Two 

41.40 

47.09 

11.51 

Lengths 

Three 

63.84 

25.16 

11.00 

Four 

76.60 

15.48 

7.92 

Two  Feet 

Legs  Same 

One 

6.24 

31.67 

62.10 

on  Surface 

Length 

Two 

3.22 

30.99 

65.79 

Three 

5.89 

19.62 

74.49 

Four 

9.71 

16.59 

73.70 

Legs  Dif- 

One 

39.30 

38.69 

22.01 

ferent 

Two 

24.93 

46.45 

28.62 

Lengths 

Three 

42.43 

27.39 

30.18* 

Four 

56.89 

18.83 

24.28* 

*  Bimodal  distributions;  higher  percentage  in  the  distribution  is  italicized. 


merely  to  fill  available  space.  For  up- 
hill figures  the  vertical  factor  governs 
in  all  four  groups.  For  downhill  figures 
the  estimates  are  split,  with  the  per- 
pendicular factor  governing  most  fre- 
quently for  two  groups  and  the  vertical 
for  two  groups.  This  time  four  of  the 
eight  distributions  are  bimodal.  Again 
these  bimodal  distributions  point  to  the 
possibility  that  subjects  were  governed 
by  one  or  the  other  of  the  extreme  fac- 


tors, diminishing  the  attraction  to  the 
other  pole  and  thus  diminishing  the 
occurrence  of  responses  within  the  ten- 
sion region. 

Floating  Figures.  As  with  subjects 
who  depicted  figures  with  one-leg- 
touching  and  one-leg-off  the  hill,  sub- 
jects who  drew  figures  floating  freely 
above  the  hill  were  more  likely  to  be 
influenced  by  the  vertical  than  the  per- 
pendicular factor.   In  the  16  distribu- 


Perpendicular  Principle:  Inate  Factors 


Figure  2.  Floating  Leg  —  Legs  of  the 
Same  Length. 


Figure  3.  Floating  Leg  —  Legs  of 
Differing  Lengths. 


tions,  the  vertical  factor  governed 
seven  times.  Seven  times  the  tension 
region  predominated;  in  only  two  in- 
stances did  the  perpendicular  factor 
govern.  Indeed  it  was  our  informal  ob- 
servation that  the  more  highly  the  fig- 
ures floated  above  the  hill  the  more 
likelihood  there  was  that  the  figures 
would  have  a  vertical  orientation.  Con- 
versely, as  floating  figures  were  drawn 
closer  to  the  baseline  of  the  hill,  it 
was  almost  as  if  a  powerful  magnet 
pulled  them  toward  the  perpendicular. 
For  floating  figures,  only  three  of 
the  16  distributions  are  bimodal.  For 
uphill  figures  five  of  the  eight  distribu- 
tions are  skewed  to  the  left,  favoring 
the  vertical  region,  while  for  downhill, 


five  of  the  eight  distributions  favor  the 
tension  region.  For  downhill  floating 
figures  with  legs  of  different  lengths 
there  was  a  less  than  ten  percent 
chance  that  the  figures  would  be  gov- 
erned by  the  perpendicular  factor. 

Figures  Breaking  the  Surface.  The 
depiction  of  the  legs  as  breaking  or 
going  behind  the  surface  was  also  an 
effective  means  by  which  subjects  were 
able  to  achieve  a  more  vertical  figure 
orientation.  All  eight  of  the  uphill  dis- 
tributions are  strongly  skewed  to  the 
left,  favoring  the  vertical  region,  al- 
though it  should  be  noted  that  three 
of  the  eight  distributions  are  bimodal 
(where  the  legs  were  of  different 
lengths).  Four  of  the  eight  distribu- 


8        B.  Wilson,  M.  Wilson 


Figure  4.  Floating  Figures  —  Legs  of  the 
Same  and  Differing  Lengths. 


Figure  5.  Figures  Breaking  the  Surface. 

tions  for  downhill  figures  are  also 
skewed  to  the  left,  favoring  the  verti- 
cal; but  only  one  of  the  eight  distribu- 
tions is  bimodal.  It  is  also  worth  noting 
that  if,  in  downhill  figures,  the  legs 
broke  the  surface  and  were  of  differ- 
ent lengths,  there  was  only  about  a  ten 
percent  possibility  that  the  orientation 
would  be  governed  by  the  perpendicu- 
lar factor. 

Figures  with  Two  Feet  on  the  Sur- 
face. It  is  only  when  two  legs  of  the 
same  length  are  anchored  to  the  sur- 
face of  the  hill  that  the  full  governing 
effect  of  the  perpendicular  factor  is 
to  be  seen.  Under  such  conditions  for 
both  up  and  downhill  figures,  57%  of 
the  responses  for  the  four  age  groups 
fall  into  the  perpendicular  region, 
while  only  9%  of  the  responses  fall 


Perpendicular  Principle:  Inate  Factors 


Figure  6.  Both  Feet  on  the  Surface  — 
Legs  of  the  Same  and  Differing  Lengths. 

into  the  vertical  region.  These  figures 
nearly  reverse  themselves  when  the 
legs  are  of  differing  lengths;  50%  of 
the  responses  fall  into  the  vertical 
range  and  only  17%  fall  into  the  per- 


pendicular range.  In  other  words,  when 
the  responses  fell  into  the  perpendicu- 
lar region  they  were  more  likely  to  have 
been  achieved  by  anchoring  two  legs 
of  the  same  length  to  the  baseline  of 
the  hill  than  by  any  other  means. 

Analysis  of  Figure-Baseline  Orien- 
tation When  Legs  Are  Bent.  The  bent- 
leg  variable  displayed  a  strong  rela- 
tionship to  the  variable  age.  Tables  3 
and  4  show  this  relationship.  In  the 
first  two  age  groups  bent  legs  were 
virtually  non-existent.  Approximately 
29%  of  the  third  age  group  and  51% 
of  the  oldest  group  depicted  bent  legs. 

As  indicated  earlier,  an  examination 
of  the  data  also  revealed  the  need  to 
analyze  the  bent-leg  variable  sepa- 
rately from  the  not-bent  variables.  By 
pooling  the  age  groups  and  by  condi- 


Figure  7.  Figures  with  Bent  Legs. 


10 


B.  Wilson,  M.  Wilson 


TABLE  3 

The  Relationship  Between  Age  and 

the  Drawing  of  Uphill  Figures 

With  Bent  Legs 


AGE  GROUP 
1           2           3 

4 

Unbent  Legs  (No.) 

111        119        56 

67 

Bent  Legs  (No.) 

1            4          26 

81 

TABLE  4 

The  Relationship  Between  Age  and 

the  Drawing  of  Downhill  Figures 

With  Bent  Legs 


1 

AGE  GROUP 
2           3 

4 

Unbent  Legs  (No.) 

112 

119 

61 

79 

Bent  Legs  (No.) 

0 

4 

21 

69 

tioning  on  bent-legs  it  was  found  that 
angle  of  figure  orientation  was  com- 
pletely independent  of  all  other  vari- 
ables. Table  5  shows  the  maximum  like- 
lihood estimates  obtained  for  figure 
orientations  in  each  of  the  three  re- 
gions. Both  distributions  are  strongly 
skewed  to  the  left,  indicating  that  bend- 
ing legs  was  a  highly  effective  means 
for  orienting  figures  in  the  vertical 
region. 

In  order  to  compare  figure  orienta- 
tions when  legs  are  bent  and  not  bent, 
Tables  6  and  7  (Summary  Tables  for 
Not-Bent)  are  presented.  Comparisons 
of  Tables  5,  6  and  7  show  the  strong 
relationship  of  the  use  of  bent  legs  to 
a  vertical  figure  orientation  as  com- 
pared to  any  of  the  non-bent  variables 


—  approximately  20%  more  for  both 
up-  and  down-hill  figures. 

An  examination  of  the  summary 
tables     also     reveals     these     facts: 

(1)  When  the  percentages  for  all 
groups  were  averaged  for  figure  ori- 
entation in  either  the  perpendicular 
or  tension  regions,  it  was  found  that 
over  60%  of  all  subjects  were  influ- 
enced  by  the  perpendicular  factor. 

(2)  The  perpendicular  factor  is  more 
likely  to  govern  for  downhill  than  for 
uphill  figures,  perhaps  indicating  that 
regardless  of  the  means  employed  — 
whether  bent  or  non-bent  leg  treat- 
ments and  surface  treatments  —  the 
downhill  figure  presented  the  more 
difficult  task.  (3)  The  perpendicular 
factor  governed  the  second  age  group 
more  strongly  than  it  did  the  first  age 
group  (as  indicated  by  the  downhill 
data  where  36%  of  the  first  age  group 
oriented  their  figures  in  the  vertical 
region  while  only  23%  of  the  second 
age  group  did  so).  In  other  words, 
under  certain  conditions  the  govern- 
ing power  of  the  perpendicular  factor 
actually  becomes  stronger  with  age 
before  that  power  is  finally  diminished. 

Now,  what  do  all  those  data  mean? 
What  do  they  have  to  do  with  Miss 
"E's"  cows,  with  innate  and  non-in- 
nate principles  and  with  graphic 
development? 

Theoretical  Projections 

We  now  wish  to  use  these  data  in 
order  to  examine  the  origins  and  na- 
ture of  the  interactions  of  the  factors 
associated  with  the  orientation  of  fig- 


TABLE  5 

Estimates  of  the  Maximum  Likelihood  That  Figures  With  Bent  Legs  Will  Be 

Oriented  in  the  Vertical,  Tension  and  Perpendicular  Region 


Vertical 


Percentage 
Tension 


Perpendicular 


Uphill  Pooled  Groups 
Downhill  Pooled  Groups 


62.39 
58.70 


26.61 
17.39 


11.01 
23.91 


Perpendicular  Principle:  Inate  Factors        11 


TABLE  6 

Summary  of  Maximum  Estimates  of  Percentages  of  Uphill  Unbent  Figures  That 

Will  Be  Oriented  in  the  Vertical,  Tension  and  Perpendicular  Regions 


Group 


Vertical 


Tension 


Perpendicular 


39.07 
42.51 
35.40 
54.95 


35.97 
38.27 
31.68 
24.74 


24.96 
19.22 
32.29 
20.31 


TOTAL 


42.98 


32.67 


24.20 


TABLE  7 

Summary  of  Maximum  Estimates  of  Percentages  of  Unbent  Downhill  Figures 

That  Will  be  Oriented  in  the  Vertical,  Tension  and  Perpendicular  Regions 


Group 


Vertical 


Region 
Tension 


Perpendicular 


36.37 
23.47 
39.19 
53.09 


38.20 
43.93 
26.26 
18.41 


26.57 
32.59 
34.55* 
29.62 


TOTAL 


38.03 


31.70 


30.83 


*  Bimodal  distribution;  the  highest  percentage  is  italicized  in  each  distribution. 


ures  in  the  up-and-down-the-hill  task. 
In  other  words,  what  might  these  data 
mean  when  used  in  the  generation  of 
hypotheses  about  graphic  production? 

Our  first  and  most  essential  asser- 
tion is  that  in  each  graphic  configura- 
tion there  are  two  potent  principles  — 
the  innate  and  the  influence.  Briefly, 
the  innate  principle  governs  such 
things  as  basic  simplicity  and  composi- 
tional order  —  the  manner  in  which  the 
parts  of  configurations  are  related  spa- 
tially. The  influence  principle  governs 
differentiation  and  the  stylistic  aspects 
of  configurations.  Each  principle  is 
multifaceted,  comprised  of  various  fac- 
tors; but  before  a  closer  examination, 
it  is  important  to  discuss  the  theoreti- 
cal implications  of  postulating  two 
graphic  principles  rather  than  one. 

Although  those  who  explain  graphic 
development  by  innate  principle  alone 
have  not  been  greatly  concerned  about 
how  the  innate  principle  functions  with 
older  children,  with  adults  (Schaefer- 
Simmern  is  perhaps  the  exception)  and 


especially  not  with  adult  artists.  Yet, 
whether  the  innate  principle  dimin- 
ishes in  power,  is  somehow  gradually 
but  totally  replaced,  or  continues  to 
influence  in  some  weakened  or  dimin- 
ished state  seems  a  most  central  ques- 
tion. This  question  is  important  be- 
cause "child  art"  is  not  an  end  state 
(Day,  1979,  p.  11)  but  a  route  through 
which  one  travels  toward  some  higher 
or  at  least  some  different  graphic  end. 
A  full  map  of  that  route  is  the  key, 
of  course,  to  the  understanding  of 
graphic  development  and,  by  exten- 
sion, to  the  understanding  of  artistic 
development.  Following  only  innate 
"routes"  leaves  us  far  short  of  our 
destination. 

Projecting  two  co-existing  govern- 
ing factors  eliminates  the  knotty  and 
perhaps  even  unsolvable  problems  of 
establishing  when  the  influence  prin- 
ciple begins  and  determining  the  even- 
tual fate  of  the  once  singular  and  all 
powerful  innate  principle.  With  the 
positing  of  the  two  principles  an  ex- 


12        B.  Wilson,  M.  Wilson 


plication  of  the  nature  of  each  seems 
the  next  order  of  business,  followed 
by  an  examination  of  the  relative  in- 
fluence of  each  principle  at  anytime 
during  development,  an  exploration  of 
the  interplay  among  factors  within 
each  of  these  two  general  principles 
and  finally  and  most  importantly,  an 
investigation  of  the  interactions  be- 
tween the  two  general  governing  prin- 
ciples. We  wish  now  to  examine  the 
nature  of  the  innate  and  the  influence 
principles  as  we  think  they  functioned 
in  the  up-and-down-the-hill  task  and 
then  explore  some  of  the  interactions 
between  them. 

As  we  examine  these  two  principles 
it  is  important  to  note  that  they  should 
be  considered  to  be  mental  phenom- 
ena. The  interaction  between  them 
occurs  as  a  cognitive  operation.  In 
other  words  graphic  configurations 
are  behavioral  manifestations  of  cog- 
nitive operations.  As  such,  these  con- 
figurations might  contain  isolated  fea- 
tures that  may  be  pointed  to  as  pure 
or  as  nearly  pure  instances  of  the  in- 
nate, and  others,  of  the  influence.  At 
the  very  beginning  of  graphic  devel- 
opment it  is  possible  for  a  configura- 
tion to  appear  to  manifest  only  innate 
factors.  This  fact  notwithstanding,  most 
configurations  manifest  at  least  traces 
of  each. 

Even  when  the  configurations  do  not 
manifest  the  fetures  of  either  the  in- 
nate or  influence  principles,  the  two 
factors  are  functioning,  but  either  the 
influence  has  not  developed  suffi- 
ciently to  produce  behavioral  evidence 
or,  in  the  case  of  the  highly  skilled 
artist,  the  innate  factors  have  been  vir- 
tually overridden.  (We  might  add  par- 
enthetically that,  depending  on  con- 
ditions, a  highly  skilled  artist  may 
produce  images  that  are  strongly  in- 
fluenced by  the  innate.  We  once 
watched  an  artist,  prominent  enough 
to  have  exhibited  in  the  Venice  Bien- 
nale,  resort  to  drawing  tadpole  figures 
in  order  to  quickly  illustrate  a  point 
that  he  was  making.)  As  we  now  be- 


gin discussing  features  found  in  the 
up-and-down-the-hill  drawings,  it  is 
important  to  remember  that  these  are 
isolated  manifestations  of  one  or  the 
other  of  the  principles.  The  images  as 
a  whole  display  both. 

The  innate  principles  in  the  up-and- 
down-the-hill  task.  When  subjects  ori- 
ented their  figures  in  the  perpendicu- 
lar and  tension  regions,  they  were 
following,  to  a  greater  or  lesser  degree, 
the  innate  predisposition  to  order  ob- 
jects at  right  angles  to  the  nearest 
baseline  (Piaget  and  Inhelder,  1956, 
pp.  375-417)  in  order  to  achieve  the 
maximum  horizontal/vertical  contrast 
of  lines  and  shapes  (Schaefer-Sim- 
mern,  1948).  When  legs  of  figures 
were  not  bent,  subjects  were  keeping 
shapes  undifferentiated  while  still 
achieving  their  graphic  goals  (Arn- 
heim,  1974,  p.  181).  In  an  overwhelm- 
ing number  of  the  responses,  the 
figures  were  drawn  walking  on  the 
baseline  of  the  hill  rather  than  be- 
hind the  ridge  line  or  on  the  implied 
plane  of  the  hill.  This  on-the-baseline 
response  seems  to  be  conditioned  by 
an  innate  factor  —  the  desire  to  avoid 
overlap  or  to  provide  each  object  with 
its  own  space  (Goodnow,  1977,  pp.  40- 
46)  even  if  it  is  only  a  figure  overlap- 
ping a  part  of  the  hill.  There  seems 
also  to  be  a  strong  innate  prohibition 
against  crossing  the  baseline  of  the 
hill,  thus  affecting  those  subjects  who 
may  have  been  inclined  to  place  fig- 
ures on  the  plane  of  the  hill.  Placing 
part  of  the  figure  behind  the  baseline 
of  the  hill  would  also  have  prevented 
subjects  from  showing  a  maximum 
amount  of  information  about  a  figure 
or  from  drawing  what  they  knew  to  be 
present  in  such  situations  (Freeman 
and  Janikoun,  1972).  One  other  impor- 
tant point  should  be  made  about  the 
use  of  the  baseline:  the  youngest 
group  were  far  less  apt  to  anchor  legs 
to  the  ridge  of  the  hill  than  any  of  the 
other  groups.  They  floated  figures 
above  the  hill  and  occasionally  sank 
them  into  the  plane  of  the  hill.  There 


Perpendicular  Principle:  Inate  Factors        13 


are  at  least  two  possible  explanations 
for  the  "floating"  and  "sunken"  fig- 
ures of  the  first  group.  The  first  is  that 
some  five-,  six-  and  seven-year-olds 
might  have  wished  to  place  the  figures 
on  the  baseline,  but  they  simply  did 
not  have  enough  skill  to  accurately 
anchor  them  —  they  were  poor  marks- 
men. The  second  possibility  is  that 
they  simply  had  no  innate  propensity 
to  use  the  ridge  baseline.  If  this  were 
the  case  then  some  other  principle 
would  seem  to  be  in  effect,  stated  as: 
"when  showing  relationships  of  ob- 
jects, it  is  sufficient  to  place  them  on 
the  same  page."  We  discount  the  sec- 
ond possibility  since  it  seems  highly 
unlikely  that  innate  factors  come  and 
go.  It  seems  much  more  probable  that 
the  anchor-to-the-baseline  rule  was  in 
effect  but  that  some  children  did  not 
yet  have  the  graphic  skill  to  provide 
behavioral  evidence  of  the  effect,  or 
that  they  were  applying  the  factor  in 
some,  as  yet,  unknown  manner. 

One  of  the  most  important  observa- 
tions to  be  made  about  the  data  is  that 
the  innate  factors  were  strongest  when 
they  joined  forces.  When  subjects  used 
the  baseline,  kept  legs  unbent,  at- 
tempted to  show  a  maximum  amount 
of  information  and  avoided  overlap- 
ping, their  figures  were  far  more  likely 
to  fall  into  the  perpendicular  region. 

One  of  the  most  curious  phenomena 
to  be  noted,  however,  was  the  manner 
in  which  subjects  used  one  or  more 
innate  factors  to  overcome  another  in- 
nate factor.  When  subjects  moved  their 
figures  into  the  tension  or  vertical 
regions,  they  often  did  so  either  by 
lengthening  one  leg  to  fill  the  extra 
space  created,  or  to  "push"  the  figure 
toward  the  vertical.  In  instances  where 
one  foot  of  an  unbent  leg  was  an- 
chored to  the  baseline  and  the  other 
was  left  suspended  in  space  over  the 
hill  so  that  the  figure  might  be  ori- 
ented more  vertically,  we  have  the  op- 
portunity to  observe  the  acceptance 
of  one  gravity-defying  improbability 
—  walking  on  air — in  order  to  avoid 


another  —  the  perpendicularly-ori- 
ented figure. 

Thus  we  have  seen  that  the  various 
innate  factors  sometimes  joined  forces, 
leading  subjects  to  produce  figures  in 
the  perpendicular  region.  At  other 
times  innate  principles  were  used  in 
order  to  enable  subjects  to  orient  fig- 
ures toward  the  vertical. 

The  influence  principle  in  the  up- 
and-down-the-hill  task.  Whereas  pre- 
vious inquiry  into  graphic  develop- 
ment has  made  easy  the  identification 
of  the  innate  factors,  that  same  inquiry 
makes  difficult  our  task  of  identifying 
influence  factors.  The  primary  reason 
for  the  difficulty  is  that  in  most  innatist 
accounts  of  graphic  development  the 
influence  factors  are  assumed  to  be 
higher  order  manifestations  of  innate 
principles.  However,  three  dimensions 
of  what  might  be  considered  the  influ- 
ence principle  have  been  posited  (Wil- 
lats,  1979).  Although  Willats  eventually 
attempts  to  refute  the  role  of  all  three 
dimensions,  he  does  characterize  a 
view  of  graphic  development  in  which 
the  child  draws  from  his  knowledge 
of  "stereotypes."  He  presents  three 
possible  sources  for  these  "stereo- 
types," each  of  which  involves  some 
aspect  of  imitation.  One  possibility  is 
that  the  child  discovers  "stereotypes" 
or  schemata  in  his  chance  scribbles. 
Later,  more  complex  schemata  are  dis- 
covered in  random  or  less  controlled 
aspects  of  already  mastered  schemata. 
The  second  is  that  the  child  bases 
"stereotypes"  on  perceptual  sensa- 
tions; in  other  words,  the  child  at- 
tempts to  produce  a  graphic  equiva- 
lent of  what  has  been  perceived  in  the 
phenomenal  world.  Willats  claims  that 
both  of  these  assumptions  are  present 
in  Luquet's  theory  (pp.  14-15).  The 
third  possibility,  according  to  Willats, 
is  that  they  are  learned  either  by  "asso- 
ciation from  the  pictorial  environment" 
—  copying  from  other  pictures  —  or 
as  the  result  of  explicit  teaching,"  "let 
me  show  you  how  to  draw  a  cube"  (p. 
15).  Gardner  (1980),  too,  argues  that 


14        B.  Wilson,  M.  Wilson 


graphic  models  play  a  role  in  develop- 
ment.  He  states  in   his  chapter  "To 
Copy  or  Not," 
We  have  seen  that  for  individuals  in 
our  society  the  achievement  of  accurate 
representational  skills  is  at  a  premium 
during  the  years  of  schooling.  Copying 
presents  itself  as  an  obvious  means  for 
attaining  such  skill,  and  we  can  expect 
youngsters  to  gravitate  toward   it  with 
or  without  support  from  others  in  their 
society  (p.  191). 

Perhaps  even  the  strongest  case  that 
might  currently  be  made  to  support 
evidence  of  the  early  age  at  which  the 
influence  factors  emerge,  the  extent 
and  the  power  with  which  they  exert 
themselves  is  in  our  paper  on  the  two- 
eyed  profile  (Wilson  and  Wilson,  1980). 
In  the  figures  in  the  up-and-down- 
the-hill  drawings,  however,  the  precise 
nature  of  the  influence  principle  is 
more  difficult  to  discern  than  when  one 
detects  an  instance  of  rather  direct 
modeling.  Obviously,  present  day  in- 
fluences may  be  seen  in  the  general 
style  of  the  drawings,  e.g.,  there  were 
no  two-eyed  profiles.  But  does  the  in- 
fluence principle  manifest  itself  in  any 
other  way?  We  think  that  any  move  to 
orient  figures  to  the  vertical  is  the 
result  of  the  influence  principle.  Here 
is  our  argument.  If  the  desire  to  use 
the  most  simple  configuration  possible 
while  still  achieving  a  graphic  goal  is 
among  the  most  basic  innate  factors 
(Arnheim,  1974,  pp.  174-182)  then  any 
movement  away  from  the  simplest  con- 
figuration used  to  present  an  object 
is,  we  think,  the  result  of  the  influence 
principle.  In  other  words,  when  a  three- 
year-old  child  draws  an  unadorned  cir- 
cle and  proclaims  it  to  be  a  person,  we 
might  assume  that  we  are  observing 
the  most  basic  instance  of  the  child's 
"satisfactory"  symbolic  presentation 
of  a  person.  If  subsequently,  the  child 
looks  at  an  actual  person  or  at  a  draw- 
ing of  a  person  by  another,  notices  two 
eyes  and  then  thinks  "oh,  my  person 
needs  eyes,  too,"  then  the  influence 
factor  has  come  into  play.  Of  course 


the  "simplicity-principle"  is  still  in  ef- 
fect, i.e.,  the  person  does  not  yet  have 
a  body,  arms  or  legs.  When  they  do 
appear  it  will  be  a  result  of  the  influ- 
ence factor.  In  the  same  way,  an  in- 
visible "influence  cable"  pulls  the  up- 
and-down-the-hill  figures  toward  a 
vertical  orientation. 

And  now  in  respect  to  the  influence 
principle,  what  might  we  be  able  to 
claim  about  the  figures  with  the  bent 
legs  —  the  feature  that  we  assume  to 
be  most  highly  related  to  the  influence 
principle  so  far  as  the  orientation  of 
the  figure  toward  the  vertical  is  con- 
cerned? (We  are,  of  course,  observing 
one  influence  factor,  bent  legs,  being 
employed  to  achieve  another  influence 
factor,  a  depiction  of  the  effect  of  grav- 
ity on  figures.)  It  is  obviously  not  pos- 
sible from  the  data  to  conclude  whether 
or  not  the  "bent"  feature  resulted  from 
direct  observation  of  people  walking 
or  from  memories  of  other  graphic 
models  of  figures  with  bent  knees. 

We  have  written  extensively  about 
the  fact  that  graphic  images  appear  to 
be  more  influential  than  perceptions 
of  the  phenomenal  world  in  providing 
models  for  drawings  (Wilson  and  Wil- 
son, 1977,  1979).  The  reasoning  behind 
our  conclusion  is  this:  graphic  images 
are  much  more  like  other  graphic 
images  than  they  are  like  objects  in 
the  phenomenal  world.  Thus  the  in- 
venting of  a  graphic  equivalent  for  an 
actual  object  may  be  more  time-con- 
suming and  more  difficult  than  merely 
borrowing  directly  from  another  static, 
simplified,  schematic  graphic  image. 
This  borrowing  may  occasionally  re- 
sult from  direct  copying  or  as  is  more 
frequently  the  case,  may  be  based  on 
a  memory  of  a  previously  experienced 
graphic  image.  In  other  words,  graphic 
images  seem  easier  to  remember  than 
phenomenal  world  perceptions. 

We  think  that  a  further  resolution  of 
the  nature  of  the  interplay  between  the 
phenomenal  perception  and  graphic 
model  aspects  of  the  influence  factor 
are  essential  to  the  understanding  of 


Perpendicular  Principle:  Inate  Factors        15 


graphic  development.  Furthermore,  we 
think  that  experiments  can  be  de- 
signed that  will  reveal  the  relative  ef- 
fect of  graphic  models  such  as  those 
on  (1)  direct  phenomenal-perceptual 
observations,  (2)  memories  of  phenom- 
enal perceptions,  (3)  memories  of 
graphic  perceptions,  (4)  direct  graphic 
rule  teaching  and  (5)  teaching  based 
on  kinetic  perceptions  of  one's  own 
body. 

Interactions  of  the  Innate  and 
the  Influence  Principle 

Each  up-and-down-the-hill  figure  con- 
tained manifestations  of  both  the  in- 
fluence and  the  innate  principles. 
Sometimes  these  principles  functioned 
in  unison  to  achieve  particular  graphic 
ends — legs  were  lengthened  to  fill 
space  created  by  a  vertically  oriented 
figure.  At  other  times,  even  when  bent 
legs  contained  a  high  degree  of  differ- 
entiation, the  invisible  power  of  the 
innate  principle  still  pulled  figures  into 
the  tension  and  occasionally  into  the 
perpendicular  orientation  regions.  Sim- 
ilarly, the  producers  of  figures  with 
influence-derived  bent  legs  avoided 
overlap  of  either  hill  or  figure  by  plac- 
ing figures  on  top  of  the  hill  baseline 
rather  than  in  the  hill  plane.  Just  as  the 
drawings  of  the  oldest  subjects  con- 
tained numerous  innate  mainfesta- 
tions,  the  drawings  of  the  youngest 
subjects  contained  influence  factors, 
but  these  influence  factors  affected 
the  configurations  or  shapes  of  the 
figures  far  more  than  they  affected 
the  manner  in  which  the  figures  were 
oriented  to  the  hill.  Among  the  oldest 
subjects  the  innate  factors  still  per- 
sisted although  sometimes  weakened 
in  their  governing  power.  In  no  way 
could  it  be  claimed  that  one  principle 
was  the  exclusive  possession  of  a  par- 
ticular age  group. 

Lest  there  be  a  misunderstanding 
that  we  ascribe  more  value  to  one  prin- 
ciple than  the  other  —  that  the  mani- 
festations of  the  influence  principle 


are  more  highly  prized  than  the  innate, 
or  that  those  of  the  innate  are  of  a  lower 
order —  may  we  now  state  that  this  is 
not  the  case.  Among  the  most  powerful 
graphic  statements,  for  example,  were 
drawings  of  figures  with  straight  legs, 
although  they  might  not  give  the  pre- 
cise appearance  of  walking  up  a  hill. 
It  is  only  in  relation  to  personal  and 
graphic  goals  that  the  question  of 
which  is  the  more  desirable  or  prefer- 
able governing  principle  may  be  an- 
swered. 

In  a  culture  such  as  ours  that  prizes 
a  high  degree  of  graphic  visual  realism 
(Gardner,  1980,  p.  191),  the  continued 
primary  reliance  of  individuals  on  in- 
nate factors  for  ordering  spatial  rela- 
tionships in  drawings  arrests  graphic 
development  far  short  of  the  implicit 
cultural  graphic  goals,  or  in  fact  short 
of  an  individual  graphic  goal.  Remem- 
ber that  Miss  "E"  was  dissatisfied  with 
her  cows  coming  down  the  hill  at  such 
"odd  angles."  Graphic  development, 
we  think,  is  essentially  a  matter  of 
learning  to  override  with  influence  fac- 
tors those  innate  factors  that  conflict 
with  current  cultural  graphic  norms 
and  personal  graphic  desires.  Without 
at  least  some  overriding  of  the  innate, 
development  simply  does  not  occur. 
There  is  no  culture  in  which  the  innate 
and  the  influence  are  isomorphic;  and, 
of  course,  we  must  also  consider  the 
situations  such  as  children's  use  of  the 
two-eyed  profile  (Wilson  and  Wilson, 
1980)  in  which  there  was  a  widespread 
modeling  from  what  is  now  a  rarely 
occurring  spontaneous  innate  mani- 
festation. In  other  words,  innate  fea- 
tures are  as  readily  modeled  as  pre- 
dominanty  cultural  ones. 

We  think  that  the  innate  principles 
remain  for  a  lifetime,  and  they  have  a 
continued  potential  to  affect  graphic 
production  although,  in  some  cases, 
they  are  almost  entirely  overridden. 
Artists,  for  example,  who  have  fully 
assimilated  linear  perspective  and 
foreshortening  conventions  in  their 
drawings  and   paintings,   might  still 


16        B.  Wilson,  M.  Wilson 


manifest  the  effects  of  innate  prin- 
ciples in  areas  that  are  not  as  fully 
conventionalized,  such  as  pictorial 
composition.  (If  we  look  carefully  we 
might  see  these  innate  manifestations 
in  Rembrandt  just  as  readily  as  we  see 
influence  manifestations  in  the  draw- 
ings of  young  children.)  Attention  to 
the  interactions  between  the  innate 
and  influence  factors  and  the  inter- 
actions among  individual  innate  and 
influence  principles  affords  a  totally 
new  means  of  theorizing  about  graphic 
development.  This  new  theoretical  po- 
sition would  free  us  from  the  severe 
limitations  of  the  age-based-innate-fac- 
tor-only formulations  that  are  neither 
able  to  account  for  an  autistic  31/2- 
year-old  girl's  being  able  to  draw  like 
a  skilled  adult  (Selfe,  1977)  nor  for  the 
normal  elderly  woman  who  draws  like 
a  child  of  three  (Wilson  and  Wilson, 
1977,  p.  7).  A  new  interactionist  theory 
would  even  provide  explanations  for 
why  a  single  drawing  sometimes  con- 
tains characteristics  from  three  or  four 
of,  say,  Lowenfeld's  developmental 
stages. 

We  think  that  further  attempts  at 
viewing  graphic  development  as  chil- 
dren's acquisition  of  increasingly  more 
complex  and  powerful  innate  rules  that 
depend  only  on  discoveries  from  the 
phenomenal  world  or  from  inventions, 
but  not  from  modeling-after  will  yield 
inadequate  one-sided  explanations. 
Adequate  theorizing  involves  account- 
ing for  and  integrating  all  relevant  vari- 
ables. 

Proceeding  on  the  premise  that 
graphic  configurations  result  from 
interactions  between  the  spatial/order- 
ing innate  principle  and  the  stylistic/ 
contour  influence  principle,  we  pose 
the  following  hypotheses:  (1)  When  a 
series  of  innate  factors  interact  with 
one  another  in  a  given  graphic  task, 
the  governing  power  of  the  innate  prin- 
ciple will  be  the  strongest;  (2)  when, 
in  an  individual's  graphic  configura- 
tion, an  innate  factor  governs  one  or 


more  aspects,  the  innate  factor  will 
continue  to  govern  until  overridden  by 
an  influence  factor  relating  to  the  same 
aspect  or  aspects;  (3)  when  one  or 
more  innate  factors  supersede  another 
innate  factor,  there  is  less  necessity 
to  employ  influence  factors  to  over- 
ride the  innate  factors;  (4)  the  influ- 
ence factors  most  easily  acquired  are 
those  that  do  not  interfere  or  conflict 
with  innate  ordering  principles;  (5)  in- 
nate-like features  are  just  as  readily 
modeled  as  more  purely  influence-re- 
lated features. 

We  have  attempted  to  characterize 
graphic  development  as  a  process  in 
which,  at  any  one  point,  a  number  of 
factors  might  come  into  play,  as  op- 
posed to  the  traditional  view  that  it  is 
simply  an  organic  process.  In  order 
to  effect  a  single  graphic  configura- 
tion, it  is  possible  to  suppose  the  inter- 
play of  a  complex  series  of  innate  fac- 
tors interacting  among  themselves,  as 
well  as  a  group  of  influence  variables 
interacting  both  among  themselves 
and  in  tandem  with  or  in  tension  to 
the  innate  factors.  Often,  the  results 
of  such  a  marriage  are  curious  and 
amusing;  but  curious  and  amusing  as 
were  Miss  "E's"  cows  and  our  up-and- 
down-the-hill  figures,  they  nonetheless 
point  to  a  new  way  to  theorize  about 
drawing  development. 

References 

Arnheim,  R.  Art  and  visual  perception:  a 
psychology  of  the  creative  eye,  the  new 
version.  Berkeley  &  Los  Angeles:  Univer- 
sity of  California  Press,  1974. 

Day,  M.  Child  art,  school  art  and  the  real 
world  of  art.  In  M.  Dobbs  (Ed.)  Art  educa- 
tion and  back  to  basics.  Reston,  Va.:  Na- 
tional Art  Education  Association,  1979. 

Freeman,  N.  H.  How  young  children  try  to 
plan  drawings.  In  G.  Butterworth  (Ed.) 
The  child's  representation  of  the  world. 
New  York:  Plenum  Press,  1977. 

Freeman,  N.  H.  and  Janikoun,  R.  Intellectual 
realism  in  children's  drawings  of  a  fa- 
miliar object  with  distinctive  features. 
Child  Development,   1972,  43,  1116-1121. 


Perpendicular  Principle:  Inate  Factors        17 


Gardner,  H.  Artful  scribbles:  the  significance 
of  children's  drawings.  N.Y.:  Basic  Books, 
Inc.,  Publishers,  1980. 

Goodnow,  J.  Children  drawing.  Cambridge, 
Mass.:  Harvard  University  Press,  1977. 

Luquet,  G.  H.  Les  dessin  enfantin.  Paris: 
Alcan,  1927. 

Lowenfeld,  V.  Creative  and  mental  growth, 
3rd  Ed.  New  York:  The  Macmillan  Com- 
pany, 1963. 

Piaget,  J.  and  Inhelder,  B.  The  child's  con- 
ception of  space  (Trans.  F.  J.  Langdon 
and  J.  L.  Lunzer)  London:  Routledge  and 
Kegan  Paul,  1956. 

Selfe,  L.  Nadia:  a  case  of  extraordinary  draw- 
ing ability  in  an  autistic  child.  New  York: 
Academic  Press,  1977. 

Schaefer-Simmern,  H.  The  unfolding  of  ar- 
tistic activity:  its  basis,  processes  and 
implications.  Berkeley  and  Los  Angeles: 
University  of  California  Press,  1948. 

Willats,  J.  Implicit  rules:  some  of  the  truth 
about  children's  drawings.  Presentations 


on  art  education  research:  perception, 
cognition  and  representation  I.  Montreal: 
Concordia  University,  1979. 

Wilson,  B.  and  Wilson,  M.  An  iconoclastic 
view  of  the  imagery  sources  in  the  draw- 
ings of  young  people.  Art  Education,  Janu- 
ary 1977,  30,5-12. 

Wilson,  M.  and  Wilson,  B.  The  case  of  the 
disappearing  two-eyed  profile:  or  how 
little  children  influence  the  drawings  of 
little  children.  Proceeding  of  National 
Symposium  for  Research  in  Art,  1980. 


Brent  Wilson 

School  of  Visual  Arts 
Pennsylvania  State  University 
University  Park,  Pennsylvania  16802 


Marjorie  Wilson 

Pennsylvania  Furnace, 
Pennsylvania  16865 


B.  Wilson,  M.  Wilson 


THE  CASE  OF  THE  DISAPPEARING  TWO-EYED  PROFILE:  OR  HOW  LITTLE 
CHILDREN  INFLUENCE  THE  DRAWINGS  OF  LITTLE  CHILDREN 


Marjorie  Wilson 
Brent  Wilson 


As  I  was  going  up  the  stair 
I  saw  a  man  who  wasn't  there 
He  wasn't  there  again  today  - 
I  wish,  I  wish  he'd  stay  away 

Hughes  Mearns 

When  Hughes  Mearns  wrote  that  qua- 
train, the  "man"  to  whom  we  devote 
this  paper  was  more  than  likely  still 
there;  and,  although  he  ceases  to  exist, 
we  are  still  apt  to  encounter  him. 
In  each  edition  of  Lowenfeld's  Crea- 
tive and  Mental  Growth,  from  the  first 
edition,  published  in  1947,  to  the  sixth, 
some  twenty-eight  years  later,  in  1975, 
there  appears  in  a  child's  drawing,  the 
same  figure  of  a  "man."  His  head  is 
clearly  turned  to  present  a  profile  view 
and  yet  he  possesses  two  eyes  with 
which  he  stares  at  us  from  the  pages 
of  the  book  (1975,  figure  96,  p.  201). 
We  smile  at  the  image  but  dismiss  it 
as  yet  another  instance  of  the  drawing 
child's  seeming  insistence  on  present- 
ing "all"  that  is  known  of  an  object  — 
the  same  phenomenon  that  produces, 
simultaneously,  interior  and  exterior 
views  of  a  house  or  both  legs  of  a 
rider  astride  a  horse  seen  in  profile. 
And  didn't  Picasso,  as  well,  present 
us  with  the  paradigmatic  model  for 
the  two-eyed  profile? 

The  young  "artist"  was  identified 
by  Lowenfeld  (1939)  as  D.H.,  one  of 
the  "weak-sighted  children"  with 
whom  he  had  worked  in  Vienna.  Sub- 
sequent information  in  The  Nature  of 
Creative  Activity  tells  us  that  the 
drawings  were  made  in  1936  when  D.H. 
was  eleven  years  old.  Lowenfeld  ac- 
counts for  the  appearance  of  the  fig- 
ure by  noting  that  ".  .  .  as  characteristic 
in  the  representation  of  the  face  that 
it  develops  from  the  frontal  drawing, 


with  dots  for  eyes,  a  vertical  line  for 
nose,  a  horizontal  one  for  mouth,  via 
a  mixed  form  containing  the  nose  at 
the  side,  to  the  profile  proper"  (p.  27). 
He  attributed  the  "mixed  front  view 
and  profile"  including  "both  eyes  and 
the  nose"  to  the  fact  that  all  were  of 
equal  significance  to  the  child  (1947, 
p.  43).  By  1975,  Brittain  has  modified 
a  good  deal  of  the  Lowenfeld  text;  yet 
he  not  only  retains  D.H.'s  two-eyed 
profile,  but  he  continues  to  account 
for  the  appearance  of  the  mixed  view 
"that  includes  a  representation  of  two 
eyes  and  a  profile  nose"  (p.  187)  as 
though  it  continued  to  exist;  but  how 
many  of  us  who  are  regularly  con- 
fronted with  drawings  produced  by 
children  have  seen  the  two-eyed  pro- 
file in  the  course  of  the  past  forty- 
five  years  or  so?  Who  or  what  is  this 
spectral  man?  We  know  that  he  once 
existed,  and  that  he  existed  in  a  multi- 
tude of  forms.  In  the  same  way  that 
the  early  global  and  tadpole  configura- 
tions cover  a  wide  spectrum,  the  many 
manifestations  of  the  two-eyed  profile 
range  from  the  merest  near-global  rep- 
resentation to  a  well-developed  model, 
complete  with  body,  arms  and  legs. 

In  "true  anthropological"  manner  we 
have  shown  that  the  two-eyed  profile 
once  inhabited  the  earth.  Because  of 
the  dearth  of  information  regarding 
the  drawings  of  children  before  the 
late  19th  century,  however,  we  have 
been  unable  to  trace  the  beginnings  of 
this  phenomenon,  although  research 

Additional  unpublished  graphic  materials 
supporting  this  research  are  available  from 
the  editorial  office  of  the  Review  of  Research 
in  Visual  Arts  Education. 


19 


Figure  1.  "Searching  for  the  lost  pencil"  D.H.,  age  11.  Collected  by  Lowenfeld,  1936,  Vienna. 
Collection  of  The  Pennsylvania  State  University. 


attests  to  a  profusion  of  these  speci- 
mens as  early  as  1882. 

The  recorded  history  begins  with  a 
study  by  the  Italian  Corrado  Ricci, 
dated  1887.  Ricci  has  recounted  the 
story  of  his  serendipitous  discovery 
of  children's  drawings  on  a  portico 
wall  in  1882,  and  the  way  in  which 
he  was  inspired  to  make  a  study  of  the 
drawings  of  young  children.  About  the 
early  figure  drawings,  he  states  that 
"before  a  man  can  become  entire  he 
must  pass  through  many  stages,  and 
they  are  not  prompted  to  jump  at  once 
from  this  primitive  form  to  complete 
physical  integrity."  The  stages  to  which 
Ricci  refers  include  the  sideways  move- 
ment of  the  figure  from  front-view  to 
profile  following  "the  little  one's  own 
laws,"  described  in  this  way: 


A  man  should  stand  as  it  pleases  him, 
in  profile  or  full  face,  and  there  is  no 
reason  for  curtailing  him;  seen  from 
just  one  side  or  the  other,  he  will  al- 
ways be  a  man  with  two  arms  and  two 
eyes. 

Ricci  found,  in  a  study  of  1250  draw- 
ings that  when  children  drew  the  pro- 
file, seventy  times  out  of  a  hundred, 
they  continued  to  include  the  two  eyes 
of  the  full  face. 

Five  years  later,  in  1892,  Earl  Barnes, 
who  had  also  conducted  a  study  of 
children's  drawings,  found  that  Ricci's 
earlier  study  had  reached  conclusions 
very  like  his  own.  Barnes,  too,  noted 
the  two-eyed  profile  to  be  "the  general 
law."  He  collated  12,740  faces  from 
pictures  drawn  by  children  from  six 
to  thirteen  years  old.  He  found  that 


20        M.  Wilson,  B.  Wilson 


Figure  2.  Collected  by  Thorndike,  circa.  1913,  U.S.A. 


"At  six  years,  twice  as  many  full-faces 
were  drawn  as  profiles.  From  six  to 
thirteen,  full-faces  decreased,  and  pro- 
files increased,  and,  at  thirteen,  there 
were  twice  as  many  profiles  as  full- 
faces.  The  number  drawn  of  each  was 
equal  to  a  point  between  nine  and  ten 
years  old." 

In  1902,  Lena  Partridge  studied  the 
human  figure  in  the  drawings  of  En- 
glish children.  Partridge's  study  is  one 
of  the  most  rigorous,  replete  with  nu- 
merous tables  and  figures  through 
which  she  was  able  to  chart  the  de- 
velopment of  the  human  figure.  She 
observed,  as  had  Ricci  and  Barnes, 
that  the  full-face  man  is  gradually 
turned  into  a  profile  man  as  the  child 
grows  older.  She  made  the  additional 
observation  that,  as  the  child  advances 
in  age,  there  is  a  tendency  to  "turn  cer- 
tain limbs  and  features  to  the  right" 
during  the  stage  occurring  between 
the  representation  of  the  full-face  fig- 


ure and  the  profile,  a  treatment  she 
described  as  "mixed."  The  pecentages 
in  her  chart  for  the  "mixed  treatment 
of  heads"  reveal  that  "until  eight  years 
of  age,  more  than  half  the  attempts  at 
profile  are  really  drawn  in  this  con- 
fused manner."  At  the  age  of  eight  the 
percentage  of  two-eyed  profiles  was 
calculated  to  be  30%.  Partridge  made 
a  supplementary  study  in  which  she 
determined  that  the  presence  of  a 
model  and  the  position  in  which  the 
children  saw  that  model  had  little  in- 
fluence on  the  drawings  of  children 
under  the  age  of  eleven.  Of  the  hun- 
dred girls  in  the  study,  23  drew  .  .  . 
the  mixed  view,  "a  strange  form,"  she 
notes,  "that  could  not  have  been  seen 
from  any  point  of  view." 

Meanwhile,  studies  in  other  coun- 
tries substantiated  not  only  the  exis- 
tence of  the  two-eyed  profile  but  the 
great  proliferation  of  these  curious 
creatures  —  not  unlike  the  insidious 


Two-Eyed  Profile:  Influence        21 


oi 


Figure  3.  Collected  by  Kerschensteiner,  circa.  1905,  Germany. 


Schmoo  (a  creation  of  Al  Capp  that 
bred  in  great  multitudes)  —  whose 
amorphous  shape  they  sometimes  as- 
sume. 

Of  the  67  drawings  mainly  by  five- 
and  six-year-old  English  children  used 
to  illustrate  the  chapter  in  his  book 
dealing  with  children  as  "draughts- 
men," Sully  (1903)  showed  36  two- 
eyed  profiles.  It  seems  to  be  no  acci- 
dent that  a  full  54%  of  the  characters 
that  he  presents  are  of  this  type.  Of 
them  he  notes: 


The  first  clear  indication  of  an  attempt 
to  give  the  profile  aspect  of  the  face 
is  the  introduction  of  the  angular  line 
of  the  side-view  of  the  nose  into  the 
contour.  The  little  observer  is  soon  im- 
pressed by  the  characteristic  well- 
marked  outline  of  the  nose  in  profile; 
and  as  he  cannot  make  much  of  the 
front  view  of  the  organ,  he  naturally 
begins  at  an  early  stage,  certainly  by 
the  fifth  year,  to  vary  the  scheme  of  the 
lunar  circle,  broken  at  most  by  the  ears, 
by  a  projection  answering  to  a  profile 
nose. 


22 


M.  Wilson,  B.  Wilson 


10 


Figure  4.  Gradual  turning  of  the  figure  to  the  right,  Partridge,  circa.  1902,  England. 


Two-Eyed  Profile:  Influence        23 


and  again  describes: 
the  mixed  scheme,  in  which  the  eyes 
and  mouth  retain  their  front-view  as- 
pect (p.  357). 

In  Germany  in  1905,  Levinstein  re- 
ported, 
Young  children  usually  draw  the  face 
in  a  full  front  view,  but  at  the  age  of 
four,  4  percent  of  them  introduce  some 
profile,  some  heads  being  drawn  with 
some  features,  especially  the  nose,  both 
in  profile  and  in  front.  At  seven,  34  per- 
cent show  transition  stages. 

In  the  same  year,  working  in  Munich, 
Kerschensteiner  presented  his  own 
study  including  some  of  the  most  idio- 
syncratic two-eyed  profiles  we  have 
found,  as  the  common  representation 
of  a  man  (1905). 

In  Belgium,  Rouma  (1912)  sought  to 
trace  the  evolution  of  the  representa- 
tion of  the  man  in  children's  drawings, 
and  to  compare  his  own  findings  with 
those  presented  by  Lena  Partridge.  In 
this  extensive  study,  Rouma  described 
in  detail  the  diverse  aspects  observed 
in  the  development  of  the  human  fig- 
ure in  individual  drawings.  "Le  Profil 
de  Transition,"  in  which  the  drawings 
appear  part  full-face  and  part  profile, 
is  designated  as  a  stage  in  that  devel- 
opment. The  sixteen  figures  and  heads 
appearing  under  this  caption  include 
figures  with  two  noses  —  one  profile, 
one  front-view,  as  well  as  a  profile 
head  with  two  eyes,  one  atop  the  other 
(pp.  50,  51).  To  the  various  explana- 
tions for  the  existence  of  the  two-eyed 
profile  —  that  it  is  the  characteristic 
view  (Lark-Horovitz  et  al.);  that  the 
child  cannot  draw  the  front-view  nose 
(Sully);  that  the  child  has  a  natural 
tendency  to  turn  the  figure  (Partridge) 
—  Rouma  hypothesized  that  it  was  the 
prominence  of  the  nose  itself  that  was 
fascinating  to  the  child,  a  feature  he 
had  seen  exploited  in  their  humorous 
drawings.  Rouma's  detailed  descrip- 
tions also  revealed  another  significant 
detail;  before  the  child  includes  the 
nose  as  a  protrusion  in  the  contour 
of  the  face,  he  noted  that  the  nose  is 


attached  to  the  left  side,  drawn  either 
as  a  small  circle  or  as  two  lines  at  an 
acute  angle,  just  as  we  observed  in 
some  of  Sully's  specimens. 

Luquet's  familiar  work  categorizes 
the  stages  of  development  in  children's 
drawing  to  include  at  age  six  and  seven 
what  he  called  intellectual  realism. 
Among  the  characteristics  of  this  stage, 
Luquet  numbered  what  he  noted  as  a 
contradiction  or  as  a  change  in  point 
of  view  included  in  the  same  drawing 
—  a  feature  translatable  to  the  two- 
eyed  profile  —  and  leaving  no  doubt 
of  that  fact  when  he  suggests  that  an 
indicator  of  the  transition  to  the  stage 
beyond  may  be  the  child's  restriction 
to  including  only  one  eye  in  a  profile 
contour. 

The  two-eyed  profile  appears,  also, 
as  step  .31/2a  on  the  1923  revision  of 
Thorndike's  1913  Scale  for  General 
Merit  of  Children's  Drawings. 

It  becomes  obvious,  then,  from  this 
mounting  body  of  evidence,  that  the 
two-eyed  profile  appeared,  to  these 
early  researchers,  to  have  been  an  in- 
nate phenomenon.  Indeed,  it  would 
seem  that,  along  with  the  ubiquitous 
scribble  and  tadpole  person,  the  child 
is  applying  a  universal  innate  principle 
of  graphic  development.  The  data  in 
studies  such  as  Ricci's  and  Barnes' 
and  Partridge's  show  a  pervasive  fre- 
quency of  the  two-eyed  profile;  and 
the  careful  charting  of  the  develop- 
ment of  a  schema  for  "man"  shows  the 
systematic  sideways  movement  of  the 
figure  —  even,  as  documented  by  Par- 
tridge, to  the  right  —  a  regularity  that 
persisted  through  Lowenfeld's  Vienna 
studies  well  into  the  thirties.  But  where 
is  the  two-eyed  profile  today,  and 
where,  in  fact,  is  its  matured  counter- 
part, the  profile  proper? 

We  begin  to  note  the  decline  and 
fall  of  the  two-eyed  profile  in  Table  1. 

Table  1  illustrates  the  surprisingly 
high  incidence  of  profiles  and  two- 
eyed  profiles  in  Western  Europe,  En- 
gland and  the  United  States  between 
the  years  1883  and  1905,  the  sharp  de- 


24        M.  Wilson,  B.  Wilson 


TABLE  1 
The  Decline  of  the  Two-Eyed  Profile" 


Source  &  Country 

Year 

Age 

% 
Profile 

%  Two- Eyed 
Profile 

Ricci;  Italy 

c 1883-86 

6-8 

70" 

Barnes;  U.S. 

1892 

9 

50 

Sully;  England 

C1895 

5-7 

85 

54 

Partridge;  England 

C1902 

8 

76 

30 

Levinstein;  Germany 

C1905 

7 

34 

Goodenough;  U.S. 

C1923 

7.5 
to 
9.5 

48 

5 

Harris;  U.S. 

1953 

8 

28 

0 

*  These  data  are  interpolations,  drawn  from  the  researchers  various  ways  of  sampling  and 
reporting.  The  chart  provides  general  trends  but  should  not  be  used  for  precise  comparisons. 
The  Goodenough  and  the  Harris  data  are  more  accurate;  they  were  tabulated  by  the  authors 
from  national  standardization  samples  of  figure  drawings  from  the  Goodenough  and  Harris 
Draw-A-Man  Tests. 
**  70%  of  all  profile  heads  were  reported  to  have  two  eyes  forward. 


dine  in  the  United  States  by  1923,  and 
the  complete  disappearance  of  the 
two-eyed  profile  by  1953.  It  is  reason- 
able to  assume  that  the  disappearance 
probably  occurred  in  the  United  States 
some  time  before  1953;  it  is  also  pos- 
sible that  the  sharp  decline  may  not 
have  occurred  as  early  in  the  European 
countries  as  in  the  United  States.  We 
have  not  located  data  to  provide  evi- 
dence of  this,  one  way  or  the  other. 

We  should  note,  as  well,  that  the 
incidence  of  the  representation  of  the 
profile  itself  appears  to  be  diminish- 
ing along  with  its  two-eyed  counter- 
part from  85%  in  1895  steadily  down 
to  a  mere  28%  in  1953. 

The  two-eyed  profile  seems  to  have 
completely  disappeared,  and  yet,  is 
it  not  curious  that,  in  spite  of  these 
facts,  in  Brittain's  1975  distillation  of 
Lowenfeld,  D.H.'s  anachronistic  man 
persists  in  his  search  for  his  pencil? 
Similarly,  in  1973,  Lark-Horovitz,  Lewis 
and  Luca  assume  the  continued  exis- 
tence of  the  two-eyed  profile.  Return- 
ing to  Ricci's  1887  study,  they  main- 
tain that  "the  schema  of  the  human 
face,  and  its  development,  has  a  logic 


of  structure  and  growth  which  is  as 
clear  in  drawings  from  the  last  century 
as  in  those  of  the  present  time,  and  in 
this  part  of  the  world  as  in  another" 
(pp.  50,  51).  We  say  that  this  is  simply 
not  so,  and  in  spite  of  assertions  to 
the  contrary,  we  fail  to  find,  either  in 
the  Lowenfeld/Brittain  illustrations  or 
in  those  of  Lark-Horovitz  et  al.  another 
incidence  of  the  two-eyed  profile.  We 
might  add  that  in  our  recent  examina- 
tion of  thousands  of  children's  figure 
drawings  from  Jordan,  Egypt,  Australia 
and  New  Guinea,  we  have  not  found  a 
single  two-eyed  profile;  and  despite 
Kellogg's  (1969)  meticulous  analysis, 
classification  and  cataloguing  of  every 
particular  in  the  drawings  of  young 
children,  our  examination  of  8000  or 
so  of  these  drawings  on  microfiche 
failed  to  reveal  a  trace  of  our  evanes- 
cent friend. 

In  Claire  Golomb's  (1974)  study  of 
the  drawing  and  modeling  in  pla-do  of 
three  hundred  children  between  the 
ages  of  two  and  seven  in  the  United 
States  and  Israel,  the  profile  is  given 
only  passing  mention.  She  states  that 
there  is  some  consideration  given  by 


Two-Eyed  Profile:  Influence        25 


the  children  to  the  drawing  of  profiles 
(p.  119),  but  if  the  profile  was  at- 
tempted by  any  of  the  subjects  it  seems 
not  to  have  merited  illustration.  Good- 
now  includes  some  profile  figures  in 
Children  Drawing  (1977),  but  they  gen- 
erally appear  as  the  running  figures  of 
older  children,  which  action  is  easier 
depicted  in  a  profile  view.  The  turning 
of  the  body  sideways,  however,  is 
noted  by  Goodnow  as  either  a  varia- 
tion or  a  small  change  in  a  "formula," 
but  nowhere  in  this  recent  work  is 
there  a  two-eyed  profile  to  be  seen. 
"The  little  man  who  wasn't  there"  is 
simply  not  there! 

We  have  come  to  the  important 
question:  What  is  the  meaning  of  this 
mysterious  disappearance?  If  the  child 
had,  indeed,  been  following  innate 
rules,  how  could  the  two-eyed  profile 
have  gone  away? 

If  innate  rules  become  altered,  modi- 
fied or  dissipated  over  time,  why  is  it 
that  some  seem  to  have  done  so  and 
others  to  have  persisted? 

Does  the  disintegration  of  this  fac- 
tual thread  in  the  carefully  constructed 
fabric  of  belief  about  the  child's 
graphic  development  mean  that  the 
entire  cloth  is  likely  to  unravel? 

If  the  explanation  given  for  the  exis- 
tence of  the  two-eyed  profile  by  Lark- 
Horovitz  et  al.  (1973)  — that  the  pro- 
file nose  as  well  as  the  frontal  eyes  are 
drawn  by  the  child  because  it  is  the 
most  characteristic  view — is  taken  as 
true,  why  is  it  that  the  child  no  longer 
includes,  in  the  general  repertoire  of 
her  developing  graphic  schema,  the  pro- 
file with  either  one  or  two  eyes? 

If,  as  Lowenfeld  claimed,  the  child 
includes  both  the  profile  nose  and 
frontal  eyes  because  all  are  of  equal 
significance  to  the  child,  could  they 
have  now  become  less  significant? 

If,  as  Partridge  theorized,  children 
have  a  natural  tendency  to  turn  the 
figure  sideways,  why  now  has  it  be- 
come (according  to  Goodnow)  merely 
a  "variation"  in  a  "formula"? 

If,  as  Sully  supposed,  the  child  draws 


the  profile  nose  because  of  the  diffi- 
culty of  drawing  the  nose  front-view, 
has  the  child  become  more  proficient 
or  the  task  less  difficult? 

If,  on  the  other  hand,  the  two-eyed 
profile  could  be  interpreted  as  a  ran- 
dom spontaneous  occurrence,  how 
does  this  explain  the  high  percentages 
of  occurrence  in  1887  and  would  not 
the  two-eyed  profile  occur  today  in 
drawings  of  humans  with  some  fre- 
quency? 

All  of  this  leads  us  to  two  further 
questions:  Of  what,  then,  was  the  two- 
eyed  profile  a  result?  Where  did  it 
come  from  and  why  has  it  disap- 
peared? 

The  coming  and  going  of  the  two- 
eyed  profile  would  seem  to  have  some 
profound  implications  for  theories  of 
graphic  development. 

The  first  conclusion  we  must  come 
to  is  that  the  two-eyed  profile  is  not 
merely  an  innate  factor,  as  Barnes  and 
the  rest  would  have  it.  If,  as  we  have 
shown,  the  two-eyed  profile  existed 
in  such  astounding  numbers  in  West- 
ern Europe,  England  and  the  United 
States  in  the  late  19th  and  early  20th 
centuries,  and  it  has  now  disappeared, 
then  we  must  conclude  that  we  are 
seeing  the  result  of  some  factor  other 
than  the  innate  —  an  influence  factor 
that  was  operative  at  first  and  later 
ceased  to  function. 

It  is  important  at  this  point  to  specu- 
late about  what  the  conditions  for  the 
proliferation,  the  subsequent  minimi- 
zation and  eventual  demise  of  the  two- 
eyed  profile  might  have  been. 

As  we  have  already  noted,  the  data 
that  might  have  disclosed  the  begin- 
nings of  the  two-eyed  profile  have 
been  buried  in  the  past.  Although  we 
do  not  know  of  its  precise  origins, 
there  are  a  few  possibilities  worth 
noting: 

The  contradictions  referred  to  by 
Luquet  as  "rabattement"  which  appear 
in  the  stage  of  intellectual  realism  in 
the  child's  graphic  development,  do, 
in  fact,  occur  spontaneously  in  the 


26         M.  Wilson,  B.  Wilson 


drawings  of  children  in  the  form  of 
aerial  views,  transparencies  and  other 
such  phenomena.  We  see,  too,  the 
depiction  of  a  cart  or  vehicle  in  a 
splayed  view,  displaying  four  wheels, 
two  on  top  and  two  on  the  bottom,  as 
related  to  the  two-eyed  profile;  while 
the  two-eyed  profile,  itself,  appears 
frequently  in  the  child's  depiction  of 
fish  and  animals  that  are  traditionally 
shown  in  a  profile  view.  One  such  de- 
piction appears  among  Heidi's  many 
renditions  of  a  horse  (Fein,  1976,  p. 
29).  In  addition,  although  appearing 
infrequently  as  does  the  two-eyed  pro- 
file as  we  have  described  it,  the  mixed 
profile  of  today,  e.g.,  head  and  body 
front;  legs  profile,  is  a  similar  manifes- 
tation. (Even  these  anomalies  however, 
show  some  evidence  of  becoming  less 
frequent  in  the  drawings  of  media-in- 
fluenced boys.) 

What  may  we  infer  from  these  spon- 
taneous occurrences?  Earlier  we  ad- 
vanced the  question  that,  if  the  two- 
eyed  profile  could  be  interpreted  as  a 
random  spontaneous  occurrence,  then 
how  might  we  account  for  the  high  in- 
cidence of  two-eyed  profiles  in  1887 
and  for  the  absence  of  occurrence  in 
drawings  of  humans  at  the  present 
time.  Here  we  will  attempt  to  answer 
that  question. 

Wilson  and  Wilson  have  earlier 
(1977)  made  the  assertion  that  the 
drawings  of  children  are  affected  by 
influences  of  the  culture,  of  objects 
in  the  phenomenal  world  (1980)  but 
primarily  and  most  importantly  that 
the  drawings  of  children  are  influenced 
by  the  drawings  of  children.  Given  the 
fact  of  the  spontaneous  occurrence 
of  the  two-eyed  profile,  might  we  not 
assume  that  the  two-eyed  profile  that 
was  so  prevalent  in  the  early  part  of 
the  century  was  a  result  of  a  spontane- 
ously occurring  phenomenon,  appear- 
ing in  the  work  of  some  children,  that 
was  passed  on  to  other  children?  Even 
so,  could  such  an  influence  alone  ac- 
count for  the  extensive  appearance  of 
the  two-eyed   profile  in  Western   Eu- 


rope, England  and  the  United  States? 
Certainly  inquiry  into  the  functioning 
of  the  spontaneous  occurrence  of  the 
two-eyed  profile  in  the  drawings  of 
some  children  today  would  reveal  little 
or  not  influence  on  the  drawings  of 
other  children.  In  fact,  given  no  re- 
inforcement and  in  the  presence  of  a 
multitude  of  options,  these  oddities 
seem  simply  to  remain  with  the  origi- 
nator, who  plays  with  them  for  awhile 
and  then  moves  on  to  other  images. 
But  this  was  surely  not  always  the 
case;  even  such  insidious  imports  as 
the  Japanese  beetle  and  the  Russian 
flu  would  cease  to  flourish  if  the  fertile 
conditions  for  their  survival  did  not 
prevail.  Let  us,  then,  speculate  as  to 
what  the  fertile  conditions  for  the  pro- 
liferation of  the  two-eyed  profile  might 
have  been.  Before  we  do,  however,  we 
would  like  to  contemplate  one  aspect 
of  the  suggestibility  or  model-ability 
of  certain  images.  How,  for  example,  it 
happens  that  we  see  certain  motifs  re- 
peated over  and  over  again  as  we  study 
children's  drawings,  e.g.,  the  rectangu- 
lar house  with  triangular  roof  and  per- 
pendicularly-oriented chimney,  with  or 
without  curling  smoke.  We  do  not  con- 
sider the  appearance  of  the  house  and 
other  such  configurations  to  signal  a 
separate  stage  in  the  child's  innate 
graphic  development,  as  the  appear- 
ance of  the  two-eyed  profile  was 
thought  to  do,  and  yet,  both  images 
would  seem  to  have  been  innately  de- 
rived, that  is,  derived  through  the  ap- 
plication of  innate  rules.  We  will  show 
in  another  paper,  however  (Wilson  and 
Wilson,  1980),  the  persistence  of  prin- 
ciples that  are  known  to  be  innate  even 
in  the  presence  of  factors  that  strongly 
influence  images  otherwise,  as  found 
in  the  drawings  of  children  and  adults 
alike.  It  is  the  interplay  of  the  innate 
and  the  influence  factors  that  we  be- 
lieve to  have  been  operating  in  the 
enduring  life  of  the  two-eyed  profile 
and  that  those  things  that  are  closest 
to  the  innate,  such  as  the  spontane- 
ously-occurring two-eyed   profile  are 


Two-Eyed  Profile:  Influence        27 


most  readily,  easily  and  naturally  mod- 
eled from  one  child  to  another.  In 
conjunction  with  the  essential  pre- 
disposition of  the  two-eyed  profile  to 
be  modeled,  then,  we  need  to  examine 
the  circumstances  that  might  account 
for  the  escalation  of  the  two-eyed  pro- 
file to  the  position  of  so  powerful  and 
dominant  a  model. 

First  we  need  to  consider  the  state 
of  children's  art  about  100  years  ago: 

The  concept  of  child  art  is  one  of 
our  own  making,  an  invention  that 
occurred  at  the  end  of  the  19th  cen- 
tury. Before  that  time  child  art  as  we 
know  it  did  not  exist.  There  would 
have  been  little  drawing  and  little 
encouragement  to  draw  in  the  home. 
The  drawing  done  in  schools  was  de- 
scribed as  highly  structured:  the 
thought  of  that  day  was  that  "the  ma- 
terial best  suited  for  originating  art 
instincts  consists  of  the  dislocated 
parts  of  conventional  designs  and  the 
typical  geometrical  forms  .  .  ."  (Burk, 
1902,  p.  323).  Spontaneous  drawing 
was  surely  not  fostered,  but  Ricci  him- 
self supplied  evidence  of  its  presence 
in  1882.  His  discovery  of  the  drawings 
of  children  on  a  remote  portico  wall 
bespoke  a  sort  of  19th  century  graffiti, 
described,  in  the  case  of  the  older 
children,  as  "hardly  what  could  be 
considered  chaste  .  .  .  inspired  by  an 
extremely  crude  realism''  and  leaving 
little  doubt  that  spontaneous  drawing 
did  exist.  We  might  note,  also,  that 
Franz  Cizek,  the  so-called  father  of 
child  art,  was  observing  at  almost  the 
same  time  —  Vienna  in  1885  —  young 
boys  making  drawings  with  chalk  on 
a  wooden  fence,  at  times  even  fighting 
over  the  ownership  of  the  space  (Viola, 
1936,  p.  12)  —  the  now  famous  inci- 
dent that  led  to  his  discovery  of  child 
art.  In  search  of  truly  spontaneous 
drawings,  Luquet,  in  fact,  made  copies 
of  children's  drawings  he  had  found 
on  walls  in  disparate  locations  in 
France  in  the  early  part  of  the  century, 
drawings  that  he  labelled  graffiti,  and 
giving  some  hint  of  the  prevalence  of 


the  pre-twentieth  century  practice  of 
drawing  on  walls.  And  what  did  chil- 
dren draw  on  walls  and  elsewhere? 
Luquet  shows  the  human  figure.  The 
studies  of  Ricci  and  Barnes,  of  Sully 
and  Rouma  and  the  rest  attest  to  the 
fact  that  the  figure  played  a  large  part 
in  the  early  drawings  of  children.  An 
1895  (Maitland,  cited  in  Burk,  1902) 
study  shows  a  marked  preference  by 
children,  when  drawing  "to  please 
themselves,"  for  drawing  the  human 
figure  over  animals,  plants  and  houses. 
The  decline  in  interest  in  drawing  the 
human  figure  and  the  preference  for 
still  life  and  geometric  design  after 
the  age  of  eleven  demonstrated  in 
those  same  tables,  indicates  what  we 
know  to  be  the  case  —  that  "after  the 
age  of  eight  or  nine,  it  seems  that  the 
difficulty  of  representing  begins  to  be 
really  appreciated  and  there  is  less 
confidence  and  satisfaction  in  the 
work"  (report  to  N.E.A.,  O'Shea,  1894). 
Where,  then,  could  children  learn  to 
satisfactorily  represent  the  human  fig- 
ure? To  whom  did  they  turn?  We  might 
assume  a  situation  of  this  kind: 

We  have  all  been  told  of  the  scarcity 
of  paper  in  the  early  part  of  the  century. 
With  this  commodity  in  such  short  sup- 
ply there  was  certainly  not  the  oppor- 
tunity for  the  child  to  spend  innumer- 
able hours  engaged  in  the  practice 
and  perfection  of  imperfect  schemata 
that  we  are  able  to  witness  with  the 
cheap  and  abundant  resources  avail- 
able today  in  the  form  of  notebook 
paper,  long  computer  print-out  sheets 
and  even,  as  Gardner  describes,  galley 
proofs  (1980,  p.  100).  And  even  if  such 
paper  had  been  available  for  these  pur- 
suits, there  would  have  been  few  mod- 
els. We  can  assume  that  adults  were 
exerting  little  or  no  influence  on  chil- 
dren's drawings;  furthermore,  media 
models  in  the  way  of  periodicals,  pic- 
ture books  or  Sunday  comics  were 
meager.  Kerschensteiner's  study  pro- 
vides us  with  some  interesting  data 
in  this  regard.  In  addition  to  other 
facts  that  he  felt  to  be  of  some  signifi- 


28 


M.  Wilson,  B.  Wilson 


Figure  5.  Luquet's  drawings  of  figures  found  on  walls.  Early  twentieth  century,  France. 


cance  such  as  sex,  age,  and  school 
grade  of  each  of  his  subjects,  Ker- 
schensteiner  carefully  made  note  of 
whether  or  not  the  child  had  bilder- 
buch  or  picture  books  in  the  home.  We 
have  been  led  to  wonder  whether,  by 
presenting  this  information  as  he  did, 
he  might  have  been,  consciously  or 
unconsciously,  reflecting  a  view  of  the 
way  in  which  picture  books  may  have 
influenced  children's  drawing.  An  ex- 
amination of  these  data  shows  that 
70%  of  the  children  who  drew  two- 
eyed  profiles  had  no  picture  books, 
while  only  34%  of  the  others  were 
reported  to  have  been  without  picture- 
books. 

Faced  with  the  paucity  of  adult  mod- 
els, the  children  drawing  on  walls  and 
fences  would  have  found  their  models 
in  the  drawings  with  which  they  were 
most  familiar  and  which  were  avail- 
able to  them.  Ricci  described  his  por- 
tico wall  as  displaying  the  drawings  of 
the  older  children  in  a  higher  position 
while  the  works  of  the  "youngest  ar- 
tists" appeared  "lowest  down  on  the 
wall."  We  may  assume  that  the  younger 
children  modeled  their  drawings  on 
those  higher  up  on  the  wall,  those  of 
the  older  children.  Cizek's  Austrian 
Tom  Sawyers,  too,  would  have  in- 
cluded older  and  younger  children 
drawing  together  on  the  fence.  We 
find  that  in  some  of  our  research  with 


the  graphic  dialogue,  when  adults 
draw  on  the  same  page  with  children 
as  well  as  when  children  draw  with 
other  children,  there  is  a  good  deal 
of  emulating  taking  place,  so  much  so, 
that,  at  times,  it  becomes  difficult  to 
separate  one  set  of  drawings  from  an- 
other. Children,  then,  would  appear 
to  have  been  mainly  influenced  by 
other  children,  the  younger  by  the 
older,  the  older  by  their  peers,  lead- 
ing to  greater  and  greater  degrees  of 
homogeneity  until  the  drawings  would 
have  become  highly  homogeneous, 
this  homogeneity  bringing  about  the 
proliferation  of  such  spontaneously- 
occurring  images  as  the  two-eyed  pro- 
file. ' 

If  this  explanation  does,  indeed,  ac- 
count for  the  appearance  of  the  two- 
eyed  profile,  then  how  can  we  account 
for  the  fact  that,  by  the  1920s  its  ap- 
pearance had  diminished  until  it  has 
now  totally  disappeared?  Where  has 
it  gone?  We  need  to  note  one  other 
important  fact.  Each  of  the  researchers 
we  have  mentioned  had  concluded,  as 
had  Dale  Harris  (1963)  much  later  in 
the  century,  that  the  two-eyed  profile 
preceded  and  was  the  result  of  a  failed 
attempt  to  draw  —  the  profile.  There- 
fore, the  profile  proper  appears  to  have 
exerted  a  great  deal  of  influence  and 
to  have  been  modeled  by  the  child  as 
the  most  characteristic  view  —  from 


Two-Eyed  Profile:  Influence        29 


other  art  sources?  from  popular  19th 
century  media?  we  do  not  know  for 
sure — but  surely  the  greater  the  in- 
cidence of  the  profile,  the  greater  the 
incidence  of  the  two-eyed  profile. 

If,  then,  the  original  problem  that 
we  set  for  ourselves,  What  caused  the 
mysterious  disappearance  of  the  two- 
eyed  profile?  can  be  answered  by  pre- 
suming that  the  disappearance  of  the 
two-eyed  profile  coincided  with  the 
disappearance  (or  at  least  the  decline) 
(Table  1)  of  the  profile,  then  we  need 
to  ask,  as  well,  What  ever  happened  to 
the  profile?  Assuming,  as  we  have,  that 
cultural  conditions  —  the  lack  of  op- 
portunity and  encouragement  to  make 
spontaneous  drawings,  the  rigid  art 
lessons  taught  in  schools,  the  lack  of 
easily  available  materials  and  the  pro- 
liferation of  profile  models — led  to 
the  birth  of  the  two-eyed  profile,  then, 
surely  cultural  conditions  would  have 
led  to  its  demise  as  well.  A  first  step 
would  be  to  chronicle  the  decline  of 
the  profile  model  as  the  most  charac- 
teristic view.  If,  in  the  1840's,  Godey's 
Ladies  stood  alone,  clad  decorously 
in  their  lavish  bonnets,  gazing  primly 
only  to  the  right  or  very  nearly  so,  the 
end  of  the  century  and  the  advent  of 
new  printing  technology  supplied  them 
with  a  good  deal  of  company.  With  the 
rise  of  illustration  in  the  popular  media, 
and  following  in  the  tradition  of  Chari- 
vari, founded  in  Paris  in  1838;  Punch, 
in  London  in  1841;  Le  Rire  in  Paris 
and  The  Yellow  Book  in  London  in 
1894;  Simplicissimus  in  Germany,  each 
featuring  cartoons  by  such  notables 
as  Daumier,  John  Tenniel,  Toulouse- 
Lautrec,  Aubrey  Beardsley,  Rowland- 
son  and  George  Grosz,  the  early  1900's 
in  America  saw  the  appearance  of  the 
daily  comic  strip  (Robinson,  1974). 

Not  unlike  the  child  of  today,  who, 
Hulk-like,  flexes  his  muscles,  makes 
growling  noises  and  dreams  of  making 
off  with  his  mother's  green  food  color- 
ing, and  the  Superman-inspired  child 
of  the  40's  who,  arrayed  with  nothing 
but  chutzpah   and   a  bedsheet  for  a 


cape,  made  more  than  one  calamatous 
jump  from  the  roof,  the  child  of  1903 
and  1904  was  presented  with  all  man- 
ner of  models  to  emulate.  And  the 
first  and  most  popular  strips  featured 
kids,  outrageous  kids  —  The  Yellow 
Kid,  The  Katzenjammer  Kids,  Buster 
Brown  and  Little  Nemo  —  a  glorious 
pastiche  of  fantasy  and  pranks  and  non- 
sense to  capture  any  child's  fancy  and 
to  satisfy  his  wildest  dreams.  The  fore- 
runner of  the  movie  cartoon,  these 
kids  were  always  in  a  state  of  anima- 
tion; they  ran,  jumped,  swam,  flew  and 
somersaulted  daily  through  their  vari- 
ous adventures,  and  one  could  not  say 
of  them,  as  of  earlier  static  illustra- 
tions, that  there  was  one  character- 
istic view.  Like  the  compelling  image 
of  the  two-eyed  profile  before  him,  the 
cartoon  kid  appealed  to  the  graphic 
spirit  of  the  child.  He  was  presented 
with  clarity,  simplicity  and  charm;  he 
was  humorous  and  outrageous  and 
appealing,  and  many  were  not  terribly 
far  removed  from  the  graphic  forms  of 
which  the  child  was  already  capable. 
Today  we  have  in  this  genre  Snoopy 
and  Charlie  Brown.  Kids  love  them; 
they  are  easy  to  reproduce  even  by 
those  with  limited  means,  and  although 
art  teachers  abhor  them,  there  is  no 
question  that  they  are  infinitely  model- 
able —  as  was  Henry  and  Popeye  and 
The  Yellow  Kid. 

What  is  truly  amazing  is  the  absolute 
power  of  images  such  as  these.  It 
would  seem  to  us  that  if  anything  is  to 
be  learned  from  the  meteoric  rise  and 
fall  of  the  two-eyed  profile,  it  is  that, 
in  order  to  realize  an  adequate  theory 
of  graphic  development,  we  will  need 
to  pay  attention  to  both  of  the  factors 
that  appear  to  be  operating  in  that 
sphere  —  the  innate  and  the  influence. 
How  do  these  two  factors  function  in 
the  developmental  scheme  vis-a-vis 
the  two-eyed  profile?  We  will  offer 
these  three  hypotheses:  1)  When  adult 
influence  is  less  extensive,  then  child 
influence  will  be  greater.  These  child  in- 
fluences,  which   are   highly  depen- 


30 


M.  Wilson,  B.  Wilson 


dent  on  the  innate  factor,  are  generally 
narrower.  2)  When  the  child  influence 
is  greatest,  options  are  fewest;  thus 
there  is  the  greatest  homogeneity  of 
figures  in  drawings.  3)  When  adult  in- 
fluence is  greater,  more  options  result 
from  the  number  of  models  available, 
leading  to  greater  variability  in  chil- 
dren's drawings  — and  less  modeling 
of  the  innately  derived  images. 

What  may  we  conclude  from  all  of 
this?  What  does  it  mean?  Why  attach 
any  importance  to  the  meteoric  rise 
and  fall  of  so  seemingly  insignificant 
a  figure? 

Conclusion 

Since  Ricci's  early  discovery  of  the 
drawings  of  children,  it  has  been  the 
popular  view  that  children's  drawings 
are  the  same  throughout  the  world; 
all  children  everywhere  initially  draw 
upon  the  same  natural,  creative  and 
generative  resources  for  their  images. 
In  charting  the  mysterious  disappear- 
ance of  the  two-eyed  profile,  we  hope, 
once  and  for  all,  to  have  dispensed 
with  the  idea  that  little  children  are 
graphic  virgins. 

The  two-eyed  profile  was  perhaps  the 
most  striking  anomaly  to  study.  How- 
ever, we  could  as  easily  have  studied 
the  rise  and  fall  of  such  features,  in  the 
drawings  of  the  children  of  the  late 
nineteenth  and  early  twentieth  cen- 
turies, as  ladder  mouths,  the  two- 
cheeked  smile  mouth,  the  astonishing 
range  of  parentheses  eyes,  the  profile 
head  very  nearly  filled  with  one  heavily- 
lashed  front-view  eye,  the  crossed  arms 
transparency,  the  arms  from  the  neck 
phenomenon,  the  garden-rake  hands, 
the  urn-shaped,  milk-bottle-shaped, 
Christmas-tree-ornament-shaped  bodies 
and  on  and  on.  None  of  these  appear 
today  with  any  more  frequency  than 
does  the  two-eyed  profile. 

We  might  speculate  that,  one  hun- 
dred years  from  now,  a  group  of  in- 
vestigators into  the  origins  of  chil- 
dren's drawings  will  smile  about  green 


creatures  with  bulging  biceps  and 
caped  men  who  appear  to  fly  through 
the  air;  and  they  will  see  yet  another 
influence  in  operation.  Even  more  im- 
portantly, at  a  time  when  it  seems  to 
be  acceptable  in  some  quarters  to 
claim  that  older  children  are  influ- 
enced in  their  quest  for  graphic  real- 
ism (Gardner,  1980),  we  wish  to  place 
the  influence  factor  at  the  very  genesis 
of  childhood  graphic  form  —  with  the 
four-year-olds  and  the  three-year-olds 
and  perhaps  even  earlier  —  to  say  that 
any  theory  of  graphic  development 
must  surely  account  for  the  effects  of 
influence  from  the  beginning.  The  very 
appearance  of  the  two-eyed  profile  in 
the  drawings  of  the  youngest  children 
provides  evidence  of  the  early  exis- 
tence of  this  influence.  But  in  what 
form  do  these  factors  exist,  and  how 
do  they  function  in  the  larger  develop- 
mental scheme?  Let  us  answer  these 
questions  in  another  paper.  .  .  . 

References 

Barnes,  E.  A  study  on  children's  drawings. 
The  Pedagogical  Seminary,  1892,  II,  455- 
466. 

Burk,  F.  The  genetic  versus  the  logical  order 
in  drawing.  The  Pedagogical  Seminary, 
1902,  9,  296-323. 

Fein,  S.  Heidi's  horse.  Pleasant  Hill,  CA: 
Exelrod  Press,  1976. 

Gardner,  H.  Artful  scribbles:  the  signifi- 
cance of  children's  drawings.  N.Y.:  Basic 
Books,  Inc.,  Publishers,  1980. 

Golomb,  C.  Young  children's  sculpture  and 
drawing:  a  study  in  representational  de- 
velopment. Cambridge,  Mass.:  Harvard 
University  Press,  1974. 

Goodnow,  J.  Children  drawing.  Cambridge, 
Mass.:  Harvard  University  Press,  1977. 

Harris,  D.  B.  Children's  drawings  as  mea- 
sures of  intellectual  maturity.  N.Y.:  Har- 
court,  Brace  and  World,  Inc.,  1963. 

Kellogg,  R.  Analyzing  children's  art.  Palo 
Alto,  California:  Mayfield  Publishing  Co., 
1969. 

Kerschensteiner,  D.  G.  Die  entwickelung  der 
zeichnerischen  begabung.  Munich:  Ger- 
ber,  1905. 

Lark-Horovitz,  B.,  Lewis,  H.  and  Luca,  M. 
Understanding  children's  art  for  better 


Two-Eyed  Profile:  Influence        31 


teaching,  2nd  Ed.  Columbus,  Ohio: 
Charles  E.  Merrill  Books,  Inc.,  1973. 

Levinstein,  Von  S.  Kinderzeichnunger  bis 
zum  14  lebensjahr.  Leipzig:  Voigtlander, 
1905. 

Lowenfeld,  V.  Creative  and  mental  growth. 
N.Y.:  Macmillan  Publishing  Co.,  Inc.,  1947. 

Lowenfeld,  V.  The  nature  of  creative  activ- 
ity. N.Y.:  Harcourt,  Brace  and  World,  1939. 

Lowenfeld,  V.,  and  Brittain,  W.  L.  Creative 
and  mental  growth,  6th  Ed.  N.Y.:  Macmil- 
lan Publishing  Co.,  Inc.,  1975. 

Luquet,  G.  H.  L'Evolution  du  dessin  enfantin. 
Bull.  Soc.  Binet,  1929. 

Mearns,  H.  Creative  power:  the  education 
of  youth  in  the  creative  arts.  2nd  Revised 
Ed.  N.Y.:  Dover  Publications,  Inc.,  1958. 

O'Shea,  M.  V.  A  study  of  drawings  of  chil- 
dren in  the  schools  of  Winnona,  Minn.,  by 
children  from  five  to  seventeen  years.  Pro- 
ceedings of  the  National  Education  Asso- 
ciation, 1894,  1015-1023. 

Partridge,  L.  Children's  drawings  of  men 
and  women.  Studies  in  Education.  Ed. 
Earl  Barnes,  July  1,  1902. 

Ricci,  C.  L'arfe  dei  bambini.  Bologna:  1887 
(Translated  by  Maitland  in  Pedagogical 
Seminary,  1894,  3). 

Robinson,  J.  The  comics.  N.Y.:  G.  P.  Put- 
nam's Sons,  1974. 


Rouma,  G.  Le  langage  graphique  de  I'enfant. 
Bruxelles:  Misch  et  Thron,  1912. 

Sully.  Studies  of  childhood.  (Revised  Ed.) 
New  York:  D.  Appleton,  1903. 

Thorndike,  E.  L.  The  measurement  of 
achievement  in  drawing.  Teacher's  College 
Record,  1913,  14. 

Viola,  W.  Child  art  and  Franz  Cizek.  Vienna: 
Austrian  Jr.  Red  Cross,  1936. 

Wilson,  B.  and  Wilson,  M.  An  iconoclastic 
view  of  the  imagery  sources  in  the  draw- 
ings of  young  people.  Art  Education,  Janu- 
ary 1977,  30,  5-12. 

Wilson,  B.  and  Wilson,  M.  The  persistence 
of  the  perpendicular  principle:  why,  when 
and  where  innate  factors  determine  the 
nature  of  drawings.  Proceedings  of  the 
National  Symposium  for  Research  in  Art, 
1980. 


Marjorie  Wilson 

Pennsylvania  Furnace, 
Pennsylvania  16865 

Brent  Wilson 

School  of  Visual  Arts 
Pennsylvania  State  University 
University  Park,  Pennsylvania  16802 


32        M.  Wilson,  B.  Wilson 


CORRESPONDENCE  BETWEEN  IMPLIED  POINTS  OF  VIEW  AND  SELECTED 
POINTS  OF  VIEW  IN  CHILDREN'S  DRAWINGS  OF  FAMILIAR  AND  UNFAMILIAR 
OBJECTS 


James  Victoria 
Michigan  State  University 


Introduction  to  the  Study 

In  this  study,  a  random  sample  of  64 
children  in  4  age  groups  (6,  8,  10  and 
12  years)  made  drawings  from  one  fa- 
miliar object  and  two  unfamiliar  ob- 
jects. (Appendix  A)  The  children  were 
free  to  manipulate  the  objects  and  to 
select  the  viewpoint  from  which  to 
draw  the  objects.  The  position  of  the 
viewpoint  of  the  objects  was  recorded. 
The  viewpoint  or  direction  of  implied 
view  in  each  drawing  was  compared 
with  the  viewpoint  from  which  the  sub- 
ject had  selected  to  view  the  stimulus 
objects. 

Data  was  collected  in  terms  of  the 
following  categories  and  classifica- 
tions: 

1.  Age  and  Sex 

2.  Object  drawn 

3.  Developmental  stage  according 
to  Transformation  System  evi- 
denced 

4.  Drawing  Class  within  a  Transfor- 
mation System 

5.  Selected  viewpoint  relative  to 
Face  or  Edge  of  object 

6.  Correspondence  with  viewpoint 
or  direction  of  view  in  each  draw- 
ing with  the  viewpoint  from  which 
the  subject  had  selected  to  view 
the  stimulus  object. 

Background  of  the  Study 

Willats  (1979,  1980)  has  stated  that 
traditional  accounts  of  the  develop- 
ment of  drawing  ability  seem  to  make 
drawing  dependent  upon  some  type 
of  copying  or  imitation.  This  is  sup- 
posed to  take  place  in  two  main  stages. 


The  imitation  of  stereotypes  by  younger 
children  during  the  period  of  so-called 
intellectual  realism  and,  the  imitation 
of  appearance  of  the  scene  by  older 
children  during  the  period  of  visual 
realism.  If  children  in  the  earlier  stages 
of  development  of  drawing  ability  have 
to  depend  on  stereotypes,  then  we 
might  expect  that  when  asked  to  draw 
from  an  object  with  which  they  are 
unfamiliar,  and  for  which  they  have  no 
stereotype,  they  would  be  unable  to 
make  a  drawing  or  would  produce  the 
nearest  available  stereotype. 

Willats  (1980)  found  that  when  chil- 
dren were  given  both  familiar  and  un- 
familiar objects  to  draw,  the  younger 
children  were  able  to  draw  the  unfa- 
miliar objects  as  freely  and  easily,  at 
about  the  same  age,  and  using  the 
same  kind  of  drawing  systems,  as  they 
were  able  to  draw  the  familiar  ones. 
This  seems  to  show  that  young  chil- 
dren, although  they  may  sometimes 
use  stereotypes,  do  not  have  to  de- 
pend on  using  them.  If  older  children 
draw  by  copying  the  appearance  of  the 
scene,  then  they  should  be  able  to 
draw  unfamiliar  objects  by  imitation 
as  easily  as  familiar  ones.  Willats  found 
that  older  children  around  the  ages  of 
10  or  11  passed  through  a  stage  in 
which  they  produced  drawings  which 
contained  "mistakes"  —  mistakes 
which  are  clearly  mistakes  in  the  use 
of  drawing  "rules"  rather  than  mis- 
takes in  imitating  the  appearance  of 

Additional  unpublished  graphic  materials 
supporting  this  research  are  available  from 
the  editorial  office  of  the  Review  of  Research 
in  Visual  Arts  Education. 


33 


Appendix  A 


the  scene.  This  seems  to  show  that  for 
older  children,  as  well  as  for  younger 
children,  imitation  does  not  play  an 
important  part  in  the  acquisition  of 
drawing  ability. 

However,  if  learning  to  draw  de- 
pends on  acquiring  drawing  rules, 
what  kind  of  rule  systems  are  they? 
The  rule  systems  we  are  probably 
most  familiar  with  are  those  of  projec- 
tive geometry;  systems  like  perspec- 
tive, which  map  spatial  relationships 
in  the  scene  into  spatial  relationships 
in  the  picture.  Besides  perspective, 
there  are  a  variety  of  other  projection 
systems:  orthographic  projection 
which  is  used  by  architects,  engineers 
and  mapmakers,  and  other  systems 
such  as  oblique  projection  and  its 
variants,  which  have  been  common  in 
other  periods  and  cultures,  and  which 
appear  in  children's  drawings.  Willats 
has  labled  these  systems  as  "transfor- 
mation systems"  because  they  deal 
with  the  transformation  of  spatial  re- 
lationships. 

Transformation  Systems  and 
Drawing  Classes 

In  Willats'  studies  (1979,  1980)  the 
developmental  sequence  revealed  in 
these  drawings  could  best  be  de- 
scribed in  terms  of  three  main  devel- 
opmental stages  corresponding  to  the 
three  main  types  of  projective  systems: 
orthographic,  horizontal  and  vertical 
oblique  and  the  various  forms  of 
oblique  projection. 


In  the  1st  stage  designated  by  Class 
2 — Single  Aspect  drawings,  the  child 
is  able  to  use  vertical  directions  on  the 
picture  surface  to  stand  for  vertical 
directions  in  the  real  scene,  and  hori- 
zontal directions  on  the  picture  sur- 
face to  stand  for  horizontal  directions 
in  the  scene.  Directions  in  the  third 
dimension  cannot  be  represented  in 
this  system  and  are  simply  omitted 
from  the  drawing.  Thus  a  cube  in  this 
system  would  be  represented  by  a 
square. 

The  next  main  stage  designated  by 
Class  4 — Horizontal  and  Vertical 
Oblique  drawings,  directions  in  the 
third  dimension  in  the  scene  are  rep- 
resented by  either  horizontal  or  verti- 
cal directions  on  the  picture  surface. 
Since  these  directions  already  repre- 
sent horizontal  or  vertical  directions 
in  the  scene,  one  direction  across  the 
surface  is  made  to  stand  for  two  direc- 
tions in  the  scene,  and  the  resulting 
drawings  are  often  ambiguous.  In  this 
system  a  cube  would  be  represented 
by  two  squares,  either  side  by  side  — 
horizontal  oblique  —  or  one  above  the 
other  —  vertical  oblique. 

In  the  third  stage  designated  by  Class 
6  —  Oblique  drawings,  directions  in 
the  third  dimension  are  represented  by 
oblique  directions  across  the  picture 
surface.  This  resolves  the  ambiguity 
in  the  previous  system.  Drawings  in 
various  other  systems  —  isometric 
projection  and  perspective  —  may 
be  regarded  as  variants  on  oblique 
projection. 


34 


James  Victoria 


The  main  framework  of  the  develop- 
mental sequence  could  be  well  de- 
scribed in  terms  of  these  transforma- 
tion systems  based  on  projective 
geometry;  but  many  of  the  drawings 
which  preceded  those  in  oblique  pro- 
jections (in  terms  of  mean  age  of  sub- 
jects for  the  class)  appeared  to  contain 
"mistakes."  One  way  of  describing 
these  drawings  was  to  say  that  they 
were  based  on  a  mixture  of  different 
transformation  systems;  i.e.,  based  on 
a  mixture  of  isometric  projection  and 
horizontal  oblique  projection.  These 
drawings  are  designated  as  Class  5  — 
Near  Oblique. 

In  between  drawings  in  Class  2 
(single  aspect)  and  Class  4  (horizontal 
and  vertical  oblique)  appeared  a  large 
number  of  drawings  of  a  type  which 
have  frequently  been  illustrated  in  the 
literature.  These  drawings  are  desig- 
nated as  Class  3  —  Multiple  Aspect 
drawings.  Although  this  class  cannot 
be  defined  in  terms  of  projective  geom- 
etry, it  lies  between  two  classes  which 
are  defined  in  terms  of  projective 
geometry. 

Preceding  the  drawings  in  Class  2, 
were  drawings  which  consisted  of 
scribble  or  closed  curved  forms.  Wil- 
lats  assigned  these  drawings  to  Class 
1  —  Pre  Single  Aspect. 

Thus  we  have  a  developmental  se- 
quence consisting  of  six  classes,  in 
which  the  sequence  of  classes  corre- 
sponds to  the  mean  age  of  subjects  in 
each  class.  (Appendix  B) 

According  to  Marr  and  Nishihara 
(1977)  vision  is  a  process  that  pro- 
duces descriptions  of  the  external 
world  which  are  useful  to  the  viewer; 
they  argue  that  for  the  purposes  of 
recognition,  the  most  useful  kind  of 
description  is  object-centered  rather 
than  viewer-centered.  Object-centered 
descriptions  are  defined  relative  to  the 
objects  themselves,  while  viewer-cen- 
tered descriptions  are  defined  relative 
to  the  viewer. 

As  we  have  seen,  Willats  has  demon- 


strated that  children's  drawings  of  rec- 
tangular objects  may  be  described  in 
the  various  systems  of  projective 
geometry,  and  that  as  children  get 
older,  they  use  systems  of  increasing 
complexity  in  order  to  produce  draw- 
ings which  are  increasingly  effective 
as  representations:  drawings,  that  is, 
in  which  spatial  relationships  between 
parts  of  the  object  may  more  readily 
be  seen,  so  that  the  object  depicted 
may  more  readily  be  recognized.  Draw- 
ings in  all  common  projection  systems, 
up  to  and  including  "naive  perspec- 
tive" may  in  theory  be  derived  from 
wholly  object-centered  representa- 
tions. Nevertheless,  since  the  transfor- 
mations on  which  these  drawings  are 
based  may  be  described  in  terms  of  pro- 
jective geometry,  such  drawings,  in 
fact,  do  imply  a  particular  point  or  direc- 
tion of  view;  it  may  be  that,  particularly 
with  older  children,  transformations 
from  viewer-centered  representations, 
as  well  as  from  object-centered  repre- 
sentations may  play  a  part  in  the  draw- 
ing process.  If  this  is  so,  then  we  might 
expect  as  children  get  older  they  learn 
to  place  objects  in  a  position  which  is 
useful  for  drawing,  so  that  there  is 
correspondence  between  their  selected 
viewpoint,  and  the  point  of  direction  or 
view  implied  in  the  drawing. 


Procedures  of  the  Study 

In  this  study,  a  random  sampling  of  64 
children  (age  6,  8,  10  and  12  years)  was 
drawn  from  two  school  districts.  Six- 
teen children  comprised  each  age 
group.  Mean  ages  for  each  group  were: 
6  years,  5  months;  8  years,  7  months; 
10  years,  7  months;  and  12  years,  7 
months.  Both  the  6-  and  10-year-old 
samples  were  comprised  of  75  per- 
cent girls  and  25  percent  boys.  The 
8-year-old  sample  was  comprised  of 
an  equal  number  of  boys  and  girls. 
The  12-year-old  sample  consisted  of 
44  percent  boys  and  56  percent  girls. 


Implied  and  Selected  Points  of  View        35 


Appendix  B 


CLASS  1 

PRE  SINGLE  ASPECT 


Mean  Age  in  Years 


5.1 


CLASS  2 
SINGLE  ASPECT 


CLASS  3 
MULTIPLE  ASPECT 


CLASS  4 

HORIZONTAL  AND 
VERTICAL  OBLIQUE 


CLASS  5 
NEAR  OBLIQUE 


CLASS  6 
OBLIQUE 


■  i  ■ 

'■  '  ■ 

■  — - —  i 

i  .I 


6.6 


6.5 


7.9 


9.6 


10.5 


71 


11.6 


8.7 


10.7 


12.7 


36        James  Victoria 


The  Experiment 

A  room  outside  the  regular  classroom 
was  used  to  conduct  the  experiment 
in  each  of  the  schools  from  which  the 
sample  population  was  drawn  (two 
elementary  and  two  middle  schools). 
The  room  was  equipped  with  a  table, 
chair  and  grid  at  the  appropriate  height 
for  each  age  level.  In  the  elementary 
schools,  two  tables  were  used:  one  at 
a  height  of  20  inches,  the  other  at  26 
inches.  A  table  height  of  29  inches  was 
used  at  the  middle  schools.  Children 
were  able  to  select  the  table  which 
provided  the  most  suitable  drawing 
position.  On  the  wall  was  placed  a 
grid  measuring  36  x  35  inches.  Each 
grid  was  5x7  inches.  The  grid  was 
four  columns  wide  and  seven  columns 
in  height.  The  grid  extended  from  the 
front  edge  of  the  table  16  inches.  The 
drawing  surface  was  a  12  x  18  inch 
sheet  of  white  drawing  paper  placed 
at  the  front  edge  of  the  table.  A  one 
inch  tape  line  separated  the  drawing 
paper  from  an  18  x  18  inch  axis  sheet, 
used  for  placement  of  the  stimulus 
objects  by  the  subject.  Each  subject 
was  photographed  against  the  wall 
grid  to  record  angle  of  view  and  eye 
point  while  drawing  each  object.  One 
hundred  ninety-two  drawings  com- 
prised the  total  sample. 

Each  subject  was  tested  individu- 
ally. Upon  entering  the  room,  the  sub- 
jects were  told  that  they  would  be 
given  three  objects  to  draw,  one  at  a 
time,  and  that  a  photograph  would  be 
taken  as  they  drew.  They  were  in- 
structed to  look  at  each  object  and 
handle  it  as  long  as  they  wished.  After 
studying  the  object,  when  they  were 
ready  to  draw,  they  were  to  place  the 
object  on  the  axis  paper  in  any  posi- 
tion they  found  most  suitable  for  draw- 
ing. They  were  instructed  to  select  a 
marker  and  make  their  drawing.  The 
subjects  were  given  the  stimulus  ob- 
jects in  random  order.  The  objects 
were  identified  as  a  cube  (C),  cube  with 


cube  added  (C+)  and  cube  with  cube 
extracted  (C-). 

After  each  subject  completed  each 
drawing,  the  experimentor  drew  a  line 
around  the  stimulus  object  on  the  axis 
sheet  and  recorded  the  faces  of  the 
object  relative  to  the  subject's  line  of 
sight. 

Descriptive  Analysis  of  the  Study 

Descriptive  analysis  of  the  data  was 
made  for  distribution  of  drawings  by 
Class  and  developmental  sequence 
characterized  by  three  Transforma- 
tion Systems,  i.e.,  Orthographic  Pro- 
jection, Horizontal  and  Vertical  Oblique 
Projection  and  Oblique  Projection;  for 
each  age  group  (N  =  48)  and  the  total 
sample  (N  =  192). 

For  all  age  levels,  30  percent  of  the 
drawings  were  assigned  to  Class  2;  24 
percent  to  Class  3;  11  percent  to  Class 
4;  16  percent  to  Class  5  and  19  percent 
to  Class  6. 

For  categorization  of  transformation 
systems,  53  percent  of  the  drawings 
occur  in  stage  I  —  Orthographic  Pro- 
jection; 12  percent  in  stage  II  —  Hori- 
zontal and  Vertical  Oblique;  and  35 
percent  in  stage  III  —  Oblique. 

For  distribution  of  drawings  by  Class 
and  Transformation  Systems  for  each 
age  level  (N  =  48),  the  following  results 
were  obtained: 

Table  1  illustrates  that  for  the  six- 
year-old  sample,  33  drawings  assigned 
to  Class  2  —  Single  Aspect;  15  to  Class 
3 — Multiple  Aspect.  All  the  drawings 
in  this  sample  were  assigned  to  Trans- 
formation System  I  —  Orthographic 
Projection. 

The  eight-year-old  sample  illustrated 
in  Table  2  was  comprised  of  18  draw- 
ings in  Class  2  —  Single  Aspect;  17 
drawings  in  Class  3 —  Multiple  Aspect; 
3  drawings  in  Class  4 — Horizontal 
and  Vertical  Oblique;  7  drawings  in 
Class  5 — Near  Oblique  and  2  draw- 
ings in  Class  6  —  Oblique.  36  drawings 
were  assigned  to  Transformation  Sys- 


Implied  and  Selected  Points  of  View        37 


TABLE  1 

Distribution  of  Drawings  by  Class  and 

Transformation  System  for  Six  Year 

Old  Subjects 


TRANSFORMATION  SYSTEM 


CLASS 


II 


III 


33 
15 


33 

15 


48 


48 


TABLE  2 

Distribution  of  Drawings  by  Class  and 

Transformation  System  for  Eight  Year 

Old  Subjects 


TRANSFORMATION  SYSTEM 


CLASS 


III 


1 

1 

2 

18 

3 

17 

4 

5 

6 

1 

18 
17 

3 

7 
2 


36 


48 


tern  I  —  Orthographic  Projection;  3 
drawings  to  Transformation  System  II 
—  Horizontal  and  Vertical  Oblique; 
and  9  drawings  to  Transformation  Sys- 
tem III  — Oblique.  One  drawing  was 
assigned  to  Class  1,  System  I;  Pre 
Single  Aspect,  Orthographic  Projec- 
tion. 

Table  3  gives  the  distributions  for 
the  ten-year-old  sample.  It  shows  that 
5  drawings  occurred  in  Class  2  —  Single 
Aspect;  11  in  Class  3— Multiple  As- 
pect; 12  in  Class  4— Horizontal  and 
Vertical  Oblique;  13  in  Class  5— Near 
Oblique;  and  7  in  Class  6  — Oblique. 
For  categorization  of  Transformation 
Systems  in  this  sample,  16  drawings 
occur  in  System  I  —  Orthographic  Pro- 
jection;  12  in  System   II  —  Horizontal 


and  Vertical  Oblique;  and  20  in  System 
III  — Oblique. 

For  twelve-year-old  subjects,  Table 
4  shows  3  drawings  assigned  to  Class 
3 — Multiple  Aspect;  7  to  Class  4  — 
Horizontal  and  Vertical  Oblique;  11  to 
Class  5  —  Near  Oblique;  and  27  to 
Class  6  —  Oblique.  Transformation 
System  I  —  Orthographic  accounted  for 
3  drawings;  System  II  —  Horizontal  and 
Vertical  Oblique,  7  drawings;  and 
System  III  —  Oblique,  accounted  for  38 
drawings. 

For  the  category  of  orientation  of 
drawings  by  face  and  edge  to  viewer's 
line  of  sight,  the  following  distributions 
were  recorded.  69  percent  of  the  draw- 
ings were  oriented  by  face  of  the  ob- 
ject to  the  viewer's  line  of  sight;  and 

TABLE  3 

Distribution  of  Drawings  by  Class  and 

Transformation  System  for  Ten  Year 

Old  Subjects 


TRANSFORMATION  SYSTEM 


CLASS 


III 


5 
11 


12 


13 
7 


5 
11 
12 
13 

7 


16  12 


20 


48 


TABLE  4 

Distribution  of  Drawings  by  Class  and 

Transformation  System  for  Twleve 

Year  Old  Subjects 

TRANSFORMATION  SYSTEM 


CLASS 


II 


III 


3 

7 

11 

11 

27 

27 

38 


48 


38 


James  Victoria 


31  percent  of  the  drawings  were  ori- 
ented by  edge  of  the  object  to  the 
viewer's  line  of  sight. 

Percentage  of  drawings  oriented  to 
stimulus  objects  by  face  and  class  to 
viewer's  line  of  sight,  are  the  following 
for  all  age  groups:  Class  2  —  Single 
Aspect,  38  percent;  Class  3  —  Multi- 
ple Aspect,  35  percent;  Class  4 —  Hori- 
zontal and  Vertical  Oblique,  16  per- 
cent; Class  5  — Near  Oblique,  7 
percent;  and  Class  6  — Oblique,  16 
percent. 

The  percentage  of  drawings  oriented 
to  stimulus  objects  by  edge  and  class 
to  viewer's  line  of  sight  is  as  follows: 
Class  2  —  Single  Aspect  accounts  for 
16  percent;  Class  3 — Multiple  Aspect 
accounts  for  18  percent;  Class  4  — 
Horizontal  and  Vertical  Oblique,  0  per- 
cent; Class  5— Near  Oblique,  37  per- 
cent; and  Class  6  — Oblique,  29 
percent. 

Table  5,  Distribution  of  Drawings  by 
Orientation  to  Face  and  Edge  by  Class 
For  Six-Year-Old  Subjects,  shows  that 
37  drawings  were  oriented  by  face, 
and  of  these,  25  were  assigned  to  Class 
2  — Single  Aspect  and  12  to  Class  3 
—  Multiple  Aspect.  Eleven  drawings 
were  oriented  to  edge.  Of  these,  8  were 
in  Class  2  —  Single  Aspect  and  3  were 
in  Class  3  —  Multiple  Aspect. 

Table  6  reveals  that  for  the  eight- 
year-old  sample,  39  drawings  oriented 
to  face  and  9  to  edge.  Of  those  draw- 
ings oriented  to  face,  17  were  in  Class 
2  — Single  Aspect;  14  in  Class  3  — 
Multiple  Aspect;  4  in  Class  4  —  Hori- 
zontal and  Vertical  Oblique;  2  in  Class 
5  —  Near  Oblique;  and  1  each  in  Class 
1  and  6,  Presingle  Aspect  and  Oblique. 
Orientation  to  edge  was  evidenced  in 
9  drawings,  5  drawings  in  Class  5  — 
Near  Oblique;  1  drawing  each  in 
Classes  1,  2,  3  and  6,  Presingle  As- 
pect, Single  Aspect,  Multiple  Aspect 
and  Oblique. 

For  the  ten-year-old  sample,  Table 
7  shows  32  drawings  oriented  to  face 
and  16  oriented  to  edge.  5  drawings 
were  assigned   to  Class  2  —  Single 


TABLE  5 

Distribution  of  Drawings  by 

Orientation  to  Face  and  Edge  by  Class 

for  Six  Year  Old  Subjects 


CLASS 

1         2 

3         4 

5 

6 

N 

FACE 
EDGE 

25 
8 

12 
3 

37 
11 

N 

33 

15 

48 

TABLE  6 

Distribution  of  Drawings  by 

Orientation  to  Face  and  Edge  by  Class 

for  Eight  Year  Old  Subjects 


CLASS 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

N 

FACE 
EDGE 

1 

1 

17 

1 

14 

1 

4 

2 
5 

1 
1 

39 
9 

N 

2 

18 

15 

4 

7 

2 

48 

TABLE  7 

Distribution  of  Drawings  by 

Orientation  to  Face  and  Edge  by  Class 

for  Ten  Year  Old  Subjects 


CLASS 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

N 

FACE 
EDGE 

5 

7 
4 

11 

1 

5 
8 

4 
3 

32 

16 

N 

5 

11 

12 

13 

7 

48 

Aspect;  7  to  Class  3— Multiple  As- 
pect; 11  to  Class  4— Horizontal  and 
Vertical  Oblique;  5  to  Class  5  —  Near 
Oblique  and  4  to  Class  6  — Oblique. 
In  drawings  oriented  to  edge,  there 
were  4  in  Class  3— Multiple  Aspect; 
1  to  Class  4 — Horizontal  and  Vertical 
Oblique;  8  to  Class  5— Near  Oblique; 
and  3  to  Class  6  —  Oblique. 

Table  8  shows  that  for  the  twelve- 
year-old  sample,  25  drawings  oriented 
to  face  and  23  drawings  oriented  to 
edge  of  the  stimulus  objects.  In  orien- 
tation to  face,  2  drawings  comprised 
Glasses  3  and  5,  Multiple  Aspect  and 
Near  Oblique;  7  in  Class  4  — Horizon- 


Implied  and  Selected  Points  of  View        39 


TABLE  8 

Distribution  of  Drawings  by 

Orientation  to  Face  and  Edge  by  Class 

for  Twelve  Year  Old  Subjects 


CLASS 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

N 

FACE 
EDGE 

2 

1 

7 

2 
9 

14 
13 

25 
23 

N 

3 

7 

11 

27 

48 

tal  and  Vertical  Oblique;  and  14  to 
Class  6  —  Oblique.  Orientation  to  edge 
shows  1  drawing  assigned  to  Class  3  — 
Multiple  Aspect;  9  to  Class  5— Near 
Oblique;  and  13  to  Class  6— Oblique. 

Descriptive  analysis  of  Correspon- 
dence Between  Selected  Viewpoint 
and  Implied  Viewpoint  for  Each  Ob- 
ject for  each  age  group  are  illustrated 
in  Tables  9  through  12. 

Distributions  relative  to  correspon- 
dence were  analyzed  relative  to  the 
three  stimulus  objects  —  cube  (C), 
cube  with  cube  added  (C+)  and  cube 
with  cube  extracted  (C-)  — for  each 
age  group  in  the  sample. 

For  the  stimulus  object  C,  12  of  the 
drawings  showed  correspondence  by 
six-year-olds;  14  by  eight-year-olds;  13 
by  ten-year-olds;  and  16  by  twelve-year- 
olds. 

There  was  no  correspondence  for 
stimulus  object  C  in  4  of  the  six-year- 
old  drawings;  3  of  the  eight-year-olds; 
and  3  of  the  ten-year-olds. 

For  stimulus  object  C-,  13  of  all 
drawings  by  six-year-olds  showed  cor- 
respondence; 13  of  the  eight-year-olds; 
15  of  the  ten-year-olds;  and  16  of  the 
twelve-year-olds. 

No  correspondence  was  evidenced 
for  C-  in  3  drawings  of  the  six-year- 
old  sample;  2  of  the  eight-year-old 
sample;  and  1  in  the  ten-year-old 
sample. 

For  stimulus  object  C  +  ,  11  of  the 
six-year-old  drawings  showed  corre- 
spondence; 15  of  the  eight-year-olds; 
15  of  the  ten-year-olds;  and  16  for  the 
twelve-year-olds. 


TABLE  9 

Correspondence  Between  Selected 

Viewpoint  and  Implied  Viewpoint  for 

Each  Object  for  Six  Year  Old  Subjects 


CORRE- 

NO CORRE- 

OBJECT 

SPONDENCE 

SPONDENCE 

N 

C 

12 

4 

16 

C  - 

13 

3 

16 

C  + 

11 

5 

16 

N 

36 

12 

48 

TABLE  10 

Correspondence  Between  Selected 

Viewpoint  and  Implied  Viewpoint  for 

Each  Object  for  Eight  Year  Old 

Subjects 


CORRE- 

NO CORRE- 

OBJECT 

SPONDENCE 

SPONDENCE 

N 

C 

14 

3 

17 

C  - 

13 

2 

15 

C  + 

15 

1 

16 

N 

42 

6 

48 

TABLE  11 

Correspondence  Between  Selected 

Viewpoint  and  Implied  Viewpoint  for 

Each  Object  for  Ten  Year  Old  Subjects 


CORRE- 

NO CORRE- 

OBJECT 

SPONDENCE 

SPONDENCE 

N 

C 

13 

3 

16 

c  - 

15 

1 

16 

c  + 

15 

1 

16 

N 

43 

5 

48 

TABLE  12 

Correspondence  Between  Selected 

Viewpoint  and  Implied  Viewpoint  for 

Each  Object  for  Twelve  Year  Old 

Subjects 


OBJECT 

CORRE- 
SPONDENCE 

NO  CORRE- 
SPONDENCE 

N 

C 

C  - 

C  + 

16 
16 
16 

16 

16 
16 

N 

48 

48 

40 


James  Victoria 


No  correspondence  was  evidenced 
in  5  of  the  six-year-old  drawings  and 
one  each  in  both  the  eight-  and  ten- 
year-old  samples,  for  stimulus  object 
C  +  . 

The  total  sample  (N  =  192)  for  all 
three  stimulus  objects  shows  that  a 
total  of  169  drawings  evidenced  corre- 
spondence between  selected  viewpoint 
and  implied  viewpoint  and,  that  only 
23  drawings  in  the  sample  evidenced 
no  correspondence. 

Summary  and  Conclusions 

The   basic   assumptions    underlying 
this  study  were  that: 

1.  Drawing  of  rectangular  objects 
by  children  may  be  described  in 
the  various  systems  of  projective 
geometry. 

2.  As  children  get  older,  they  use 
systems  of  increasing  complexity 
in  order  to  produce  drawings 
which  are  increasingly  effective 
as  representations. 

3.  The  transformations  on  which 
these  drawings  are  based  may  be 
described  in  terms  of  projective 
geometry;  such  drawings  imply 
a  particular  point  or  direction  of 
view,  so  that  there  is  correspon- 
dence between  selected  orienta- 
tion to  face  or  edge  primitives 
and  the  transformations  used  in 
drawing. 

4.  Children,  as  they  get  older,  learn 
to  place  objects  in  a  position 
which  is  useful  for  drawing,  so 
that  there  is  correspondence  be- 
tween the  selected  viewpoint  and 
the  point  or  direction  of  view  im- 
plied in  the  drawing. 

The  results  of  this  study  support 
the  assumption  that  when  drawing 
rectangular  objects,  children  use  repre- 
sentations which  can  be  described  in 
the  various  systems  of  projective 
geometry,  and  as  they  get  older,  use 
increasingly  more  complex  systems. 
53  percent  of  all  drawings  in  the  sample 


(N  =  192)  were  characterized  as  Ortho- 
graphic Projections;  12  percent  as  Hori- 
zontal and  Vertical  Oblique  Projections; 
and  35  percent  as  Oblique  Projections. 
Further,  for  the  six-  and  eight-year-old 
samples  (N  =  96)  87  percent  of  the  draw- 
ings were  characterized  as  Ortho- 
graphic Projections,  the  least  complex 
projection  system.  However,  for  the  10- 
and  12-year-old  samples  (N  =  96)  20 
percent  of  the  drawings  were  character- 
ized as  Horizontal  and  Vertical  Oblique 
Projections  and  60  percent  of  the  draw- 
ings were  characterized  as  Oblique  Pro- 
jections, the  most  complex  projection 
system. 

The  assumption  that  there  is  corre- 
spondence between  face  or  edge  primi- 
tives and  implied  view  point  as  charac- 
terized by  the  projection  systems  used 
seems  to  be  supported.  For  the  total 
sample  (N  =  192)  69  percent  of  the  draw- 
ings were  oriented  by  face  to  the 
viewer's  line  of  sight  and  31  percent 
were  oriented  by  edge  to  the  viewer's 
line  of  sight.  Of  those  drawings  oriented 
by  face  to  viewer's  line  of  sight,  89  per- 
cent were  accounted  for  by  transforma- 
tions characterized  as  Orthographic 
and  Horizontal  and  Vertical  Oblique 
Projections.  Transformations  based  on 
Oblique  Projections  accounted  for  66 
percent  of  all  drawings  oriented  by  edge 
to,the  viewer's  line  of  sight. 

That  88  percent  of  all  drawings  in  the 
sample  (N  =  192)  for  all  three  stimulus 
objects  evidenced  correspondence  with 
the  selected  direction  or  point  of  view 
indicates  that  most  children,  when 
given  the  opportunity  to  position  the 
objects,  will  place  these  objects  in  a  way 
that  is  useful  to  them  in  drawing.  In  ad- 
dition, the  data  shows  that  by  age  level, 
as  the  children  get  older,  there  is  in- 
creasing correspondence  between 
selected  direction  of  view  and  implied 
direction  of  view  in  the  drawings  for  all 
three  stimulus  objects.  For  six-year- 
olds,  75  percent  of  the  drawings  show 
correspondence;  for  eight-year-olds,  88 
percent  of  the  drawings  show  corre- 
spondence; for  the  ten-year-olds,  90 


Implied  and  Selected  Points  of  View        41 


percent  of  the  drawings  show  corre- 
spondence; and  for  twelve-year-olds, 
100  percent  of  the  drawings  evidenced 
correspondence. 

Thus,  the  data  indicates  that  chil- 
dren, as  they  get  older,  learn  to  place 
objects  in  a  position  useful  for  draw- 
ing so  that  there  is  correspondence 
between  the  selected  viewpoint  and 
the  point  of  direction  or  view  implied 
in  the  drawing. 

Acknowledgments 

I  would  like  to  acknowledge  research 
support  for  this  study  from  Michigan 
State  University  and  to  thank  particu- 
larly John  Willats,  Faculty  of  Art  and 
Design,  Northeast  London  Polytech- 
nic, for  his  helpful  discussions  and  for 
sharing  with  me  his  on-going  research 
findings  in  this  area  of  investigation. 

I  would  also  like  to  express  my  appre- 
ciation to  Mr.  Frank  Philip,  Director, 
ARTS  Project,  Waverly  Public  Schools, 
for  his  cooperation  in  facilitating  vari- 
ous aspects  of  the  study;  and  also  the 
school   administrators,   parents  and 


children  for  their  cooperation  and  par- 
ticipation. 

References 

Marr,  D.  and  Nishihara,  H.  K.  Representation 
and  recognition  of  the  spatial  organiza- 
tion or  three-dimensional  shapes.  The 
Artificial  Intelligence  Laboratory,  Cam- 
bridge, Massachusetts,  1977. 

Willats,  J.  How  children  learn  to  draw  realis- 
tic pictures.  Quarterly  Journal  of  Experi- 
mental Psychology,  1977,  29,  367-382. 

Willats,  J.  Implicit  rules:  some  of  the  truth 
about  children's  drawings.  Victoria,  J. 
and  Sacca,  E.  J.  Eds.  Presentations  on  Art 
Education  Research,  1979,  No.  3,  11-23. 

Willats,  J.  What  do  the  marks  in  the  picture 
stand  for?  The  child's  acquisition  of  sys- 
tems of  transformation  and  denotation. 
National  Art  Education  Association  Con- 
ference, 1980,  Atlanta,  Georgia. 


James  Victoria 

Department  of  Art 
Michigan  State  University 
East  Lansing,  Michigan  48824 


42 


James  Victoria 


COMPOSITIONAL  DESIGN  AS  A  PERCEPTUAL  DETERMINANT 
OF  AESTHETIC  JUDGMENT1 


Calvin  F.  Nodine 
Temple  University 


There  has  been  much  speculation 
from  both  artists  and  art  connoisseurs 
alike  about  how  compositional  design 
affects  the  way  paintings  are  viewed 
and  judge  aesthetically.  Typical  of 
such  speculations  is  one  by  Dondis 
(1973)  stating  that  what  holds  true  for 
both  complex  shapes  and  complicated 
compositions  is  ".  .  .  the  eye  seeks  out 
the  felt  axis  in  any  visual  event  in  an 
unending  process  of  establishing  rela- 
tive balance"  (p.  27).  Yet,  there  is  little 
scientific  evidence  to  support  the  claim 
of  Dondis,  and  others,  who  have  em- 
phasized the  significant  role  that  the 
eye  plays  in  the  analysis  of  visual  dis- 
plays, and  in  particular  the  analysis  of 
paintings. 

The  purpose  of  my  paper  is  to  exam- 
ine the  relationship  between  composi- 
tional design,  visual  scanning  behavior 
and  aesthetic  judgment.  Compositional 
design  refers  to  the  arrangement  of 
visual  elements  —  lines,  colors  and 
forms  —  which  make  up  a  painting. 
This  definition,  which  stresses  design, 
reflects  the  view  of  the  Neotraditional- 
ist  artist,  Maurice  Dennis,  who  said  that 
a  painting  ".  .  .  before  it  is  a  battle 
horse,  a  nude  woman,  or  some  anec- 
dote is  essentially  a  plane  surface  cov- 
ered with  colors  arranged  in  a  certain 
order"  (Chipp,  1968,  p.  94).  Dennis' 
definition  can  be  applied  to  more  tra- 
ditional styles  of  art  by  re-emphasiz- 
ing the  very  issue  he  was  fighting 
against,  the  representational  signifi- 
cance of  the  arrangement  of  visual 
elements. 

For  the  artists  that  I  chose  to  study, 
visual  elements  were  combined  into 
forms  denoting  real-world  objects  and 
events.  Thus,  emphasis  shifts  from  the 


perceptual  arrangements  of  visual 
forms  to  the  logical  arrangement  of 
visual  content.  There  has  been  much 
written  about  this  relationship  dating 
back  to  the  Greeks  who  thought  that 
compositional  harmony  could  be  ex- 
pressed mathematically  (Hambridge, 
1920).  From  the  Greeks  came  geo- 
metric relationships  derived  from  the 
Golden  Section  (Boas  and  Wrenn, 
1964).  These  geometric  relationships 
were  integrated  into  formal  composi- 
tional rules  by  later  artists,  in  particu- 
lar, Renaissance  painters. 

Bouleau  (1963)  has  referred  to  these 
formal  compositional  rule  systems  as 
"The  Painter's  Secret  Geometry."  He 
has  shown  how  this  geometry  influ- 
enced not  only  Renaissance  but  mod- 
ern painters  as  well. 

Bouleau's  analysis  examines  the 
thesis  that  formally-derived  geometric 
relationships  guided  the  arrangement 
of  visual  content  for  many  well-known 
artists.  Although  his  work  focuses  on 
representational  painting,  he  also 
shows  how  the  Golden  Section  has 
been  used  by  some  nonrepresenta- 
tional  painters  (e.g.  Modrian). 

Although  Bouleau's  thoughtful  anal- 
ysis of  paintings  provided  me  with  a 
scientific  basis  for  testing  the  rela- 
tionship between  compositional  de- 
sign and  looking  behavior,  the  inspira- 
tion for  this  paper  really  came  from 
Isabel  Bishop,  a  well-known  New  York 
figurative  painter.  It  was  she,  through 
her  paintings,  who  first  introduced  me 
to  the  significance  of  the  golden  sec- 
tion. She  believes  that  the  diamond 
formed  when  strings  are  stretched  di- 
agonally across  her  rectangular  canvas 
and  the  square  within  it  reveals  ".  .  . 


43 


an  especially  significant  area  in  the 
content  of  a  picture."  (Lunde,  1975, 
p.  73).  You  will  see  one  of  her  paintings 
later. 

There  have  been  a  number  of  scien- 
tific studies  of  the  way  that  people  look 
at  paintings.  Probably  the  best  known 
studies  are  those  of  Buswell  (1935)  and 
Brandt  (1945)  who  recorded  eye  move- 
ments of  subjects  as  they  looked  at  a 
variety  of  visual  displays  among  which 
were  paintings.  Buswell  distinguished 
two  types  of  fixations  as  the  eye  ana- 
lyzed a  painting:  survey  fixations  which 
occurred  early  and  were  designed  to 
provide  a  general  characterization  of 
the  painting;  examination  fixations, 
usually  of  longer  duration,  concen- 
trated on  visual  features.  More  recent 
evidence  by  Antes  (1974)  and  my  own 
research  (Nodien,  Carmody  &  Kundel, 
1978;  Nodine,  Carmody  &  Herman, 
1979)  suggest  that  survey  fixations  not 
only  serve  to  provide  an  overall  char- 
acterization of  the  painting  but  also 
serve  to  define  clusters  of  interrelated 
visual  elements  which  are  then  sub- 
jected to  a  detailed  analysis  by  longer- 
duration  examination  fixations. 

None  of  the  above-mentioned  studies 
have  actually  manipulated  the  design 
of  a  painting  in  order  to  see  how  it 
affects  the  way  the  eye  analyzes  the 
painting,  or  how  this  analysis  is  linked 
to  judgments  as  to  which  design  is 
more  pleasing  aesthetically.  The  pres- 
ent study  remedies  this  shortcoming 
by  focusing  on  the  relationship  be- 
tween looking  and  judging.  It  asks  first, 
how  the  ordering  of  visual  content  in- 
fluences the  viewer's  pattern  of  atten- 
tion, and  second,  whether  this  pattern 
of  attention  reflects  an  analysis  of  per- 
ceptual relationships  used  in  making 
aesthetic  judgments. 

The  present  study,  more  specifically, 
compares  the  visual  scanning  behavior 
to  two  paintings  having  identical  visual 
elements  but  different  compositional 
arrangements.  This  was  accomplished 
by  experimentally  manipulating  the 
visual  elements  in  a  group  of  paintings 


selected  on  the  basis  of  Bouleau's 
analyses.  The  manipulation  consisted 
of  changing  the  relationship  among 
visual  elements  by  cutting  the  paint- 
ings apart,  re-ordering  the  parts,  and 
pasting  them  back  together.  This  ma- 
nipulation had  the  effect  of  producing 
a  new  composition  having  the  same 
visual  elements  as  the  original  paint- 
ing. The  proportions  of  the  painting 
remained  relatively  unchanged.  Only 
the  design  changed.  The  effect,  as  you 
will  see,  was  to  produce  a  set  of  paint- 
ings in  which  new  relationships  among 
visual  elements  changed  the  repre- 
sentational significance  of  the  com- 
positions. 

Method 

It  is  the  relationship  between  the  de- 
sign and  content  of  visual  elements  — 
the  unique  mapping  of  visual  content 
on  to  a  formal  geometric  structure  — 
that  unifies  a  painting  compositionally 
according  to  Bouleau's  analysis.  This 
relationship  is  examined  in  his  anal- 
ysis of  Seurat's  painting,  La  Parade, 
chosen  for  the  study  because  of  Seu- 
rat's strict  adherence  to  geometric 
formalism  in  the  design  of  his  paint- 
ings. I  shudder  to  think  what  Seurat 
would  have  said  about  my  altered  ver- 
sion which  destroys  the  balance  among 
visual  elements  so  carefully  worked 
out  in  the  original.  The  original  and 
altered  versions  of  La  Parade  are 
shown  in  Figure  1.  For  the  moment, 
ignor  the  broken  vertical  lines  and 
numbers.  I  shall  return  to  them  later 
when  I  discuss  the  results.  Two  more 
of  Seurat's  paintings  were  also  used 
in  the  study.  One  was  The  Models 
shown  in  Figure  2  in  the  original  and 
altered  version.  The  other  pair  con- 
sisted of  two  sketches  for  La  Grande 
Jarre:  an  early  sketch  and  a  final  sketch 
shown  in  Figure  3.  The  alterations  in 
this  case  were  done  by  the  artist,  of 
course. 

Two  other  paintings  were  altered. 
One  was  Isabel  Bishop's  Five  Women 


44 


Calvin  Nodine 


Fig.  1  —  La  Parade 


-3  +4  -6  +9  -2  0 

Fig.  2  — The  Model 


Fig.  3  —  La  Grande  Jatte 

Walking  #2  shown  in  Figure  4  in  the 
original  which  displays  the  formal  sym- 
metry that  her  paintings  are  known  for, 
and  my  alteration  which  breaks  up  this 
formal  symmetry.  The  diagonal  lines 
to  the  square  and  rectangle  reveal  the 
diamond  which,  according  to  Bishop, 
plays  a  key  role  in  the  analysis  of  the 
composition  by  the  eye  by  virtue  of  its 
likelihood  of  receiving  the  viewer's 
early  attention  (Bishop,  1980). 

The  fifth  painting,  again  chosen  for 
its  expression  of  formal  symmetry, 
was  Piero  della  Francesca's  Flagella- 
tion shown  in  the  original  form  and 
altered  form  in  Figure  5.  In  this  case 
the  alteration  deletes  a  key  composi- 
tional element  from  a  representational 
standpoint,  the  Flagellant,  without 
which  the  narrative  sense  of  the  paint- 
ing is  lost.  The  formal  symmetry  is 
also  taken  out  of  balance  by  the  re- 
moval of  the  space  occupied  by  the 
flagellant  which  changes  the  propor- 
tions of  the  architectural  structure 


Composition  as  Perceptual  Determinants        45 


0.1  2  3.45 


0  +6  -4  +8  -1  -5  -4 

Fig.  4 —  Five  Women  Walking  #2 


+1  -17        +9  +1  +8  -1 

Fig.  5  —  The  Flagellation 


housing  the  group  of  figures  on  the 
left  containing  Christ. 

The  five  pairs  of  paintings  were 
shown  to  eight  adult  subjects.  All  but 
two  of  these  subjects  were  either  sci- 
entists or  engineers.  An  artist  and  art 
educator  completed  the  sample. 

The  two  versions  of  each  painting 
were  presented  sequentially,  the  order 
of  the  original  and  altered  versions 
being  counterbalanced  over  subjects. 
Subjects  were  given  5  seconds  to  veiw 
each  version  of  the  pair.  Following 
presentation,  subjects  were  instructed 
to  judge  which  of  the  two  versions 
represented  a  more  harmonious  ar- 
rangement of  visual  elements  and  sub- 
ject matter  and  to  explain  the  reasons 
for  their  choice. 

As  the  subjects  looked  at  the  paint- 
ings, their  eye  movements  were  re- 
corded using  a  Biometrics  eye-move- 
ment monitor  interfaced  to  a  PDP  1 1/40 
computer. 

The  eye  movement  monitor  con- 
sisted of  two  infrared  sensors  attached 
to  a  pair  of  spectacles.  The  right  sen- 
sor measured  horizontal  movements 
and  the  left  sensor  measured  vertical 
movements.  The  subject's  head  was 
held  stationary  by  a  combination  head- 
holder  and  bite-board.  Movements  of 
the  eyes  were  sensed  and  translated 
into  voltage  changes  which  were  then 
digitized  and  interpreted  as  changes 
in  fixation  or  attention  within  the  field 
of  view.  A  more  technical  discussion 
of  the  eye-movement  system  is  pre- 
sented in  Carmody,  Nodine  &  Kundel 
(1980). 

During  the  5  seconds  in  which  sub- 
jects viewed  each  version  of  a  paint- 
ing, shifts  in  attention  produced  unique 
fixation  patterns.  For  analysis  pur- 
poses, these  fixation  patterns  were 
superimposed  over  the  appropriate 
version  of  a  painting.  Each  version  of 
a  painting  was  divided  into  seven  col- 
umns. The  amount  of  attention  in  terms 
of  time  spent  fixating  each  column 
was  determined  for  each  subject. 


46        Calvin  Nodine 


All  subjects  were  required  to  begin 
scanning  each  picture  in  the  lower 
left  corner  of  column  5.  This  insured 
uniformity  of  starting  location  and  pre- 
vented the  subject  from  fixating  the 
center  of  the  display  initially.  This  pro- 
cedure resulted  in  a  bias  which  in- 
creased the  amount  of  looking  in  col- 
umn 5.  The  attention  time  in  column  5 
was  corrected  by  subtracting  out  initial 
fixations. 

Results 

All  of  the  paintings  described  above 
were  designed  using  formal  composi- 
tional rules  based  on  the  golden  sec- 
tion. These  rules  specify  potential  sites 
for  the  placement  of  key  visual  con- 
tent, but  not  the  form  that  this  con- 
tent will  take,  nor  the  order  in  which 
it  will  be  arranged.  These  decisions 
are  left  to  artistic  intuition. 

Arbitrarily  re-arranging  visual  con- 
tent effectively  severs  logical  connec- 
tions among  visual  forms  carrying  key 
representational  information.  The  ar- 
rangement of  visual  content  is  lack- 
ing, and,  it  is  this  logical  issue  that 
should  be  the  focus  of  the  subject's 
judgments  of  compositional  harmony. 

This  hypothesis  was  tested  by  ask- 
ing three  questions  of  the  eye  move- 
ment data.  First,  how  do  subjects 
start  looking  at  a  painting?  Is  their 
initial  glance  influenced  by  past  experi- 
ence, especially  after  having  seen  one 
version  of  a  painting?  Second,  how 
do  alterations  in  composition  affect 
the  way  the  painting  is  viewed?  What 
shifts  in  attention  occur?  Third,  how 
do  changes  in  the  way  the  painting  is 
viewed  affect  judgments  of  composi- 
tional harmony? 

The  first  question  asks  how  past  ex- 
perience affects  the  way  that  visual 
scanning  is  initiated.  Does  the  fact 
that  Western  Painting,  which  tradi- 
tionally arranges  key  content  informa- 
tion around  the  center  of  the  composi- 
tion, cause  the  eye  to  seek  information 


in  the  center  of  the  painting  as  so  many 
artists  believe? 

To  answer  this  question,  I  looked  at 
the  first  four  fixations  of  all  eight  sub- 
jects over  all  five  pairs  of  pictures,  a 
total  of  80  eye-movement  records.  The 
results  indicate  that  attention  shifts 
from  the  pre-determined  starting  point 
in  the  lower  right  hand  corner  of  col- 
umn 5  (proportion  of  fixations  in  col- 
umn 5  on  fixation  1  was  .88),  which 
all  subjects  were  required  to  fixate 
first,  to  the  center  of  the  display  desig- 
nated by  columns  2,  3  &  4  by  fixation 

3  (proportion  =  .72),  and  to  left  center 
columns  2  &  3  containing  Bishop's  dia- 
mond by  fixation  4  (proportion  =  .64). 
Thus,  in  less  than  a  second,  most  sub- 
jects were  fixating  the  center  of  the 
painting.  Although  there  was  some 
variability  as  to  whether  fixation  3  was 
left,  right  or  dead  center,  there  is  no 
question  that  an  initial  looking  bias 
existed  in  my  subjects  for  the  center 
of  the  painting.  From  a  perceptual 
viewpoint,  moving  the  eyes  to  the  cen- 
ter would  yield  more  effective  use  of 
peripheral  vision  allowing  an  overall 
glimpse  of  the  painting  which  might 
be  useful  in  assessing  over  composi- 
tional design. 

Interestingly,  the  initial  looking  bias 
was  not  altered  by  looking  at  first  one 
version  of  the  painting  and  then  the 
otheV.  The  pattern  of  the  first  four  fixa- 
tions was  almost  identical  for  painting 
in  original-altered  and  altered-original 
sequences. 

Fixation  data  were  analyzed  by  super- 
imposing the  same  six  column  grid 
over  each  version  of  the  five  paintings. 
Each  column  represents  a  width  of  7.2 
cm  or  a  5  degree  visual  angle.  Visual  con- 
tent in  each  of  these  columns  was  re- 
lated to  eye-fixation  patterns. 

Although  the  initial  four  fixations 
focused  on  the  center  of  the  painting, 
fixation  patterns  during  the  remaining 

4  seconds  of  viewing  differed  signifi- 
cantly for  each  version  of  a  painting. 
These  fixation  pattern  differences  were 


Composition  as  Perceptual  Determinants        47 


examined  by  looking  at  shifts  in  atten- 
tion among  the  six  columns  between 
one  version  of  the  pair  and  the  other. 
As  expected,  shifts  in  attention  were 
unique  for  each  pair  of  paintings.  Let 
me  illustrate. 

The  first  pair  was  Seurat's  Models. 
Subjects  gave  the  standing  model  in 
the  center  a  great  deal  of  attention  in 
the  original  version  as  illustrated  by  the 
typical  fixation  pattern  shown  in  Figure 
6A.  In  the  altered  version,  attention 
shifted  to  the  sitting  model  on  the  left. 
This  shift  occurred,  according  to  sub- 
ject explanations,  because  of  the  un- 
natural perspective  of  the  room  that, 
unknown  to  them,  resulted  from  my  re- 
versing right  and  left  halves  of  the 
painting  so  that  the  back  wall  on  the 
right  side  of  the  original  became  left 
front  wall  of  the  altered  version  and 
vice  versa.  All  eight  subjects  who  chose 


the  original  remarked  about  this  per- 
spective problem,  a  representational 
issue  that  detracted  from  the  composi- 
tional harmony  of  the  altered.  Their 
shifts  in  attention  from  the  original  to 
the  altered  version  measured  as  per- 
cent viewing  time  and  percent  change 
in  viewing  time  in  columns  0-6  are 
shown  below  the  original  and  altered 
versions  of  each  painting  in  Figures  1-5. 
The  top  row  gives  the  percent  of  fixa- 
tion time  in  each  column  for  the  origi- 
nal. The  bottom  row  gives  the  percent 
change  in  fixation  time  from  original 
to  altered  version.  Returning  to  Figure 
2,  the  numbers  below  the  altered  ver- 
sion indicate  that  both  of  the  sitting 
models  received  more  attention  in  this 
version  than  in  the  original  version. 
Another  visual  feature  frequently  men- 
tioned was  the  painting  within  the 
painting  of  La  Grande  Jatte  which, 


Fig.  6A  —  The  Models  (original) 


48 


Calvin  Nodine 


along  with  the  standing  model  on  the 
right,  received  increased  attention  in 
the  altered  version  as  shown  in  Figure 
6B. 

The  relationship  between  shifts  in 
attention  and  choices  for  one  composi- 
tion over  the  other  was  expressed  simi- 
larly in  all  of  the  remaining  pairs. 

In  Seurat's  Parade  all  but  one  sub- 
ject chose  the  original  version  in  which 
the  visual  elements,  according  to  Bou- 
leau's  analysis,  are  carefully  arranged 
to  balance  attention  among  orchestra, 
trombone  player  and  conductor.  The 
percentages  in  Figure  1  indicate  that 
in  the  altered  version,  attention  shifted 
to  the  conductor  on  the  left  who  is  no 
longer  conducting,  or  to  the  orchestra 
which,  by  being  moved  to  right  center, 
steals  the  solo  away  from  the  trombone 
player  on  the  far  right. 

Turning  to  a  more  contemporary 
painter,   Isabel   Bishop's  painting  pro- 


duced more  disagreement  among 
subjects  about  which  version  is  more 
harmonious  compositionally,  and,  two 
different  patterns  of  looking  at  each  ver- 
sion. The  altered  version  was  preferred 
4-3  with  one  undecided.  Those  that 
chose  the  original  stressed  the  geo- 
metric balance  of  movement  in  the 
composition.  Those  that  chose  the 
altered  version  stressed  the  dynamic 
feeling  of  movement  associated  with 
the  asymmetrical  arrangement  of  fig- 
ures. Attention  was  shifted  between 
the  three  women  on  the  left  and  the 
pair  on  the  right  whose  walking  direc- 
tions produced  varied  patterns  com- 
pared with  the  synchronized  walking 
patterns  depicted  in  the  original.  Dif- 
ferences in  choice  produced  differ- 
ences in  both  patterns  of  attention, 
and  change,  between  original  and  al- 
tered versions.  Figure  4  indicates  that 
attention   patterns  for  both  choices 


Fig.  6B  — The  Models  (altered) 

Composition  as  Perceptual  Determinants        49 


focus  on  the  three  women  in  the  center 
in  the  original. 

The  altered  version  produced  dif- 
ferences in  attention  patterns.  The 
original  choice  focused  on  the  woman 
in  purple  (second  from  right)  moving 
left,  which  presumably  upset  the  bal- 
ance of  the  composition  according  to 
their  preference.  The  altered  choice 
focused  on  the  opposition  between  the 
same  woman  in  purple  (third  from  right 
row)  moving  left  and  the  woman  with 
one  black  stocking  (last  on  right)  mov- 
ing right,  which  created  a  dynamic 
movement-countermovement.  This  is 
reflected  in  the  fixation  pattern  in  Fig- 
ure 7.  You  will  also  note  in  Figure  4 
that  attention  within  the  diamond  lo- 
cated in  column  3,  which  is  a  key  area 
for  Bishop,  increased  with  the  shift  of 
the  woman  in  purple  to  column  3  in 
the  altered  version. 


Moving  back  in  time  to  the  Renais- 
sance, Piero  della  Francesca's  Flagel- 
lation was  the  most  difficult  painting 
to  alter,  and,  although  the  changes  in 
this  picture  were  generally  less  notice- 
able according  to  subject's  reports, 
the  alterations  nevertheless  produced 
significant  changes  in  attention  refer- 
ring back  to  Figure  5.  The  original  was 
preferred  over  the  altered  version  6-2. 
What  is  interesting  about  this  painting 
is  how  the  artist  balanced  the  three 
visually  dominant  figures  in  the  right 
foreground  with  the  group  containing 
the  central  action  in  the  left  back- 
ground by  framing  the  left  group  within 
an  architectural  space.  Many  of  the 
subjects  commented  on  this  balance 
issue  which  was  noted  in  both  ver- 
sions but  somewhat  less  so  in  the 
altered  version.  The  other  significant 
feature  of  the  composition  is  the  flagel- 


Fig.  7 —  Five  Women  Walking  #2  (altered) 


50 


Calvin  Nodine 


lant,  whose  central  placement  and 
raised  arm  singles  him  out  visually 
from  Christ  and  the  accompanying 
figures.  The  action  represented  in  the 
composition  and  the  recipient  of  it, 
draws  a  great  deal  of  attention  in  the 
original  as  the  typical  fixation  pattern 
in  Figure  8A  shows.  When  the  flagel- 
lant is  removed  attention  shifts  to  the 
three  figures  on  the  right  (Figure  8B). 

The  overall  attention  patterns  shown 
in  Figure  5  confirm  this  point.  Two  sig- 
nificant shifts  show  up  when  the  al- 
tered version  is  presented.  First,  at- 
tention is  drawn  away  from  Christ  to 
the  void  left  by  the  removal  of  the  flag- 
ellant. His  removal  affects  the  composi- 
tion both  visually  and  logically,  since 
the  actor  and  action  are  no  longer 
present  —  only  the  recipient.  Subject 
attention  shifts  to  column  3  regardless 
of  the  order  of  the  pictures,  original- 
altered  or  altered-original;  so  the  ef- 
fect is  not  due  primarily  to  memory 
but  because  of  the  unresolved  action. 

Second,  the  removal  of  the  flagel- 
lant changes  the  actor-action  relation- 


ship, shifting  the  bulk  of  attention  to 
the  three  figures  on  the  right.  Many 
subjects  remarked  that  these  three 
figures  seemed  more  dominant  in  the 
altered  version  even  though  they  could 
not  point  to  a  difference  between  the 
two  versions. 

All  of  the  pairs  considered  thus  far 
have  compared  carefully  planned  com- 
positions against  arbitrary  composi- 
tions made  up  of  the  same  elements. 
The  final  pair  tested  the  effect  of  a 
planned  change  by  the  artist  from  an 
early  sketch  of  La  Grande  Jarre  to  a 
final  sketch.  The  two  sketches  differ 
compositionally  as  indicated  in  the 
overlay  shown  in  Figure  9.  The  final 
sketch  is  brighter  than  the  earlier  one 
both  here  and  in  the  colored  original. 
More  importantly  from  a  compositional 
standpoint,  Seurat's  final  version  is 
more  balanced  than  the  earlier  one. 
He  gained  this  balance  by  (a)  removing 
the  standing  figure  and  changing  the 
relationship  of  the  dominant  figure 
grouping  on  the  right  (b)  adding  a  dis- 
tinctive form,  the  lady  with  the  red 


Fig.  8A  —  The  Flagellation  (original) 


Composition  as  Perceptual  Determinants        51 


Fig.  8B  —  The  Flagellation  (altered) 


unbrella,  thus  creating  a  central  focal 
point  and  (c)  making  minor  changes  in 
the  arrangement  of  the  minor  group- 
ings in  the  right  central  and  left  fore- 
ground. 

Which  version  did  my  subjects 
choose?  The  final  version,  6-2.  Atten- 
tion patterns  (Figure  3)  are  balanced 
between  left,  right  and  center  in  the 
final  sketch  (top),  whereas  the  earlier 
sketch  (bottom)  lacks  focus  so  that 
attention  is  overbalanced  on  the  ends, 
leaving  a  hole  in  the  center. 

The  results,  as  far  as  Seurat  is  con- 
cerned, support  his  theory  of  composi- 
tion which  applies  the  secret  geometry 
so  systematically.  Given  his  penchant 
for  science  (Homer,  1964),  I  think  he 
would  have  forgiven  my  brutal  treat- 
ment of  his  compositions. 

The  findings  generalize  beyond 
Seurat,  however.  The  arrangement  of 
visual  elements  directly  affects  the 
way  the  eye  analyzes  a  composition. 
Initial  fixations  (1-4)  gravitate  to  the 
left  center  of  the  painting  due  to  a 


looking  bias  that  reflects  a  character- 
istic of  information  patterns  in  pictures 
generally.  Whether  the  painter's  secret 
geometry,  which  stresses  the  impor- 
tance of  the  left  center  of  a  picture,  is 
the  cause  or  the  effect  of  the  looker's 
bias  is  not  clear.  However,  the  left 
center  area  plays  a  significant  role  in 
establishing  an  overall  impression  of 
the  arrangement  of  visual  information 
in  a  picture. 

The  model  that  these  finding  suggest 
is  one  in  which  visual  structure,  atten- 
tion and  judgments  of  compositional 
design  are  intimately  related. 

First,  visual  structure  resulting  from 
the  artist's  use  of  formal  composi- 
tional rules  of  the  type  suggested  by 
Bouleau,  provides  a  framework  for 
arranging  visual  content.  The  center 
of  the  picture  is  used  as  a  major  focal 
point  around  which  visual  content  is 
arranged.  Bishop  says,  ".  .  .  one  can 
either  give  this  area  particular  density 
and  clarification  leading  to  it  from  the 
ambiguous  forms  and  spaces  around 


52 


Calvin  Nodine 


Fig.  9  —  The  Grande  Jatte  (overlay) 


it,  or  conversely,  leave  it  empty  with 
clearer  forms  around  it"  (Lunde,  1975, 
pp.  73-74). 

Second,  based  on  an  overall  char- 
acterization of  the  composition  derived 
from  initial  survey  fixations,  visual 
scanning  seeks  out  logical  relation- 
ships between  visual  form  and  content 
using  long-duration  examination  fixa- 
tions. The  result  is  a  unique  fixation 
pattern  with  multiple  focal  points  re- 
vealing detailed  analysis  of  represen- 
tational connections  among  visual 
content. 

Finally,  from  these  attention  pat- 
terns, inferences  can  be  drawn  about 
the  importance  assigned  to  the  ar- 
rangement of  visual  content  in  making 
judgments  about  compositional  de- 
sign, which  can  to  some  extent  be 
corroborated  by  subject  reports. 

This  model  suggests  a  number  of 


interesting  questions  about  other  re- 
lationships between  visual  structure 
and  perception.  For  example,  what  is 
the  nature  of  the  visual-form  relation- 
ships expressed  in  non-representa- 
tional paintings,  and  how  does  it  differ 
from  representational  paintings?  (An 
issue  close  to  Maurice  Dennis'  heart.) 
How  does  art  education  affect  the 
kinds  of  relationships  that  viewers  fo- 
cus on?  Our  findings  suggest  that  art 
training  may  influence  attention  strate- 
gies. 

Footnote 

1.  Based  on  a  paper  presented  at  the  Na- 
tional Symposium  for  Research  in  Art,  Uni- 
versity of  Illinois,  October  7-10,  1980.  This 
study  was  performed  during  a  research  and 
study  leave  granted  to  me  by  Temple  Uni- 
versity, 1979-80.  I  wish  to  express  my  appre- 
ciation to  Isabel  Bishop  for  her  encourage- 


Composition  as  Perceptual  Determinants        53 


ment  and  guidance  in  designing  this  study, 
James  J.  McGinnis  who  helped  with  the  data 
analysis,  and  Barbara  Nodine  whose  edi- 
torial suggestions  helped  clarify  my  writing. 

References 

Antes,  J.  R.  The  time  course  of  picture  view- 
ing. Journal  of  Experimental  Psychology, 
1974,  103,  62-70. 

Bishop,  I.  Personal  Communication,  August 
30,  1980. 

Boas,  G.,  &  Wrenn,  H.  H.  What  is  a  picture? 
New  York:  Shocken,  1964. 

Bouleau,  C.  The  painter's  secret  geometry. 
New  York:  Harcourt,  Brace  &  World,  1963. 

Brandt,  H.  F.  The  psychology  of  seeing.  New 
York:  Philosophical  Library,  1935. 

Buswell,  G.  T.  How  people  look  at  pictures. 
Chicago:  University  of  Chicago  Press, 
1935. 

Carmody,  D.  P.,  Kundel,  H.  L,  &  Nodine,  C.  F. 
Performance  of  a  computer  system  for 
recording  eye  fixations  using  limbus  re- 
flection. Behavior  Research  Methods  & 
Instrumentation,  1980,  12,  63-66. 

Chipp,  H.  B.  Theories  of  modern  art.  Berke- 
ley: University  of  California  Press,  1968. 


Dondis,  D.  A.  A  primer  of  visual  literacy. 
Cambridge:  MIT  Press,  1973. 

Hambridge,  J.  Dynamic  symmetry:  the  Greek 
vase.  New  Haven:  Yale  University  Press, 
1920. 

Homer,  W.  I.  Seurat  and  the  science  of 
color.  Cambridge:  MIT  Press,  1964. 

Lunde,  K.  Isabel  Bishop.  New  York:  Abrams, 
1973. 

Nodine,  C.  F.,  Carmody,  D.  P.  &  Kundel, 
H.  L.  Searching  for  NINA.  In  J.  W.  Senders, 
D.  F.  Fisher,  &  R.  A.  Monty  (Eds.)  Eye 
Movements  and  the  Higher  Psychological 
Functions.  Hillsdale,  N.J.:  Erlbaum,  1978. 

Nodine,  C.  F.,  Carmody,  D.  P.  &  Herman,  E. 
Eye  movements  during  visual  search  for 
artistically  embedded  targets.  Bulletin 
of  the  Psychonomic  Society,  1979,  13, 
371-374. 


Calvin  F.  Nodine 

Department  of  Educational  Psychology 

Temple  University 

Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania  19122 


54 


Calvin  Nodine 


CHILDREN'S  COMPREHENSION  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  REPRESENTATION 


Harry  Beilin 

City  University  of  New  York 


In  this  paper  I  describe  a  program  of 
research  devoted  to  an  understanding 
of  photographic  representation.  This 
program  is  motivated  in  part  by  the 
recognition  that  in  an  industrialized 
society  photographs  are  so  pervasive 
as  to  significantly  affect  the  conscious- 
ness and  understanding  of  both  adults 
and  children.  Despite  the  fact  that  mod- 
ern photographic  technology  has  been 
with  us  for  at  least  150  years  and  an 
estimated  billion  photographs,  if  not 
more,  are  produced  each  year  through- 
out the  world,  it  is  surprising  how  little 
is  known  of  the  processes  by  which 
photographs  come  to  represent  mean- 
ing, communicate  information,  act  as 
instruments  of  social  control  and  ex- 
change, and  serve  as  aesthetic  objects. 
Nor  is  very  much  known  about  how 
children  acquire  the  competencies  to 
extract  from  or  impose  meaning  upon 
photographs,  although  photographs 
are  encountered  very  early  in  their 
lives  and  are  used  extensively  in  their 
education  long  before  formal  school- 
ing begins. 

Psychologists  and  others  have  for 
the  most  part  treated  photographs, 
either  explicitly  or  implicitly,  as  though 
they  functioned  in  the  same  manner  as 
other  pictures  and  bore  the  same  rela- 
tion to  the  objects  of  representation 
and  the  viewer  as  other  pictures. 
Among  psychologists,  however,  Ru- 
dolf Arnheim  is  an  exception.  He  says, 
"The  photograph  has  an  authenticity 
from  which  painting  is  barred  (1974, 
p.  154),"  and,  "All  I  have  said  derives 
ultimately  from  the  fundamental  pecu- 
liarity of  the  photographic  medium.  The 
physical  objects  themselves  print  their 
image  by  means  of  the  optical  and 
chemical  action  of  light."  Thus,  "(1) 


The  picture  is  coproduced  by  nature 
and  man  and  in  some  ways  looks  strik- 
ingly like  nature,  and  (2)  the  picture  is 
viewed  as  something  made  by  nature 
(p.  156),"  and  lastly,  "(the)  conviction 
that  the  picture  was  generated  by  a 
camera  profoundly  influences  the  way 
he  views  and  uses  it  (p.  156)." 

To  a  social  critic  like  Susan  Sontag 
(On  Photography,  1977),  there  is  no 
question  but  that  the  photograph  influ- 
ences the  manner  in  which  the  world 
is  reacted  to;  this  is  quite  different 
from  the  influence  of  other  means  of 
communication,  representation  and 
persuasion.  Enough,  in  fact,  to  per- 
suade her  that  photography  is  inher- 
ently an  evil  force  in  the  present  social 
order,  an  instrument  of  perpetuating 
the  status  quo  and  a  means  of  social 
control  that  robs  the  individual  of  the 
joy  of  direct  experience,  and  the  social 
system  of  the  opportunity  for  change. 

To  the  art  critics  and  artists  of  the 
1800's,  the  photograph  was  suffi- 
ciently different  in  kind  so  that  on  its 
appearance  it  created  terror  in  their 
hearts  and  led  to  Beaudelaire's  dra- 
matic declaration,  "Henceforth,  paint- 
ing is  dead!",  even  if  this  reflected  at 
least  a  partial  misunderstanding  of 
both  painting  and  photography.  From 
the  1840's,  when  modern  photography 
was  invented,  until  recently  (the  past 
20  years)  photography  was  considered 
as  only  barely  qualified  to  be  consid- 
ered a  legitimate  art  form  for  reasons 
related,  interestingly  enough,  to  dif- 
ferences in  theories  of  pictorial  repre- 

Presented  at  the  National  Symposium  for 
Research  in  Art  conference,  "Learning  in 
Art,"  at  the  University  of  Illinois,  Urbana, 
October,  1980. 


55 


sentation  and  the  relations  of  such 
forms  to  reality.  To  put  it  succinctly, 
these  questions  concern  the  fidelity 
of  photographs  to  reality  and  their 
authenticity  as  documentation  of  the 
real.  In  one  view,  photographs  capture 
a  trace  of  the  object  itself.  In  effect 
the  photographer  and  the  camera 
merely  record  what  is  perceived  (a 
position  held  by  J.  J.  Gibson).  In  an- 
other view,  the  photograph  is  the  prod- 
uct of  the  photographer's  conception 
of  the  objects  of  representation.  The 
photograph  does  not  correspond  to 
reality  but  to  the  schemata  (Gombrich) 
that  structure  the  picture  makers'  "dia- 
logue with  the  world"  (Worth,  1981). 

This  fundamental  difference  in  con- 
ception of  the  nature  and  function  of 
photographs  divides  social  scientists, 
humanists,  art  critics  and  others  who 
have  given  serious  attention  to  the 
nature  of  photography. 

Do  the  presumed  differences  be- 
tween photographs  and  other  pictorial 
forms  have  a  basis  in  fact  and  does  the 
photographic  process  differ  from  nor- 
mal vision?  Photographic  representa- 
tion differs  from  seeing  and  other 
modes  of  picturing  in  a  number  of 
ways.  Vision,  for  one,  is  not  set  in  a 
rectangular  boundary  as  is  the  photo- 
graph and  related  modes  of  depiction. 
The  photograph  shows  everything  in 
sharp  focus  from  edge  to  edge,  which 
does  not  accord  with  foveal  and  periph- 
eral vision.  The  black  and  white  photo- 
graph clearly  differs  from  the  world  as 
experienced  in  color,  but  even  color 
photographs  differ  from  the  experi- 
enced color  of  the  world  (Snyder, 
1980).  Photographs  differ  significantly 
from  other  forms  of  representation  in 
having  a  fixed  station  point,  that  is, 
they  are  projections  from  a  single  view- 
ing position;  paintings  and  drawings 
need  not  be.  The  photographic  image 
is  inexhaustible  in  ways  no  other  pic- 
torial representation  can  be,  to  which 
any  enlargement  of  a  photograph  at- 
tests. These  differences  certainly  em- 
phasize that  the  structural  character- 


istics of  the  camera  (its  shape,  lens, 
etc.)  affect  the  ultimate  character  of 
the  photograph  and  the  way  it  is  com- 
prehended. But  that  is  not  the  entire 
story,  inasmuch  as  photographic  con- 
ventions clearly  contribute  to  the  crea- 
tion and  understanding  of  what  the 
photograph  is  intended  to  convey. 
These  conventions  are  evident  in  the 
photographer's  manipulation  and  use 
of  lighting  to  affect  mood  and  attitude, 
in  the  darkroom  manipulations  of  mon- 
tage, of  pose  and  hundreds  of  details 
upon  which  an  entire  industry  of  photo- 
graphic manual  publishing  feeds.  Not 
only  is  the  professional  photographer's 
expertise  based  on  the  exploitation  of 
such  conventional  knowledge,  a  good 
portion  of  contemporary  photographic 
art  is  derived  from  experimentation 
that  leads  to  the  creation  of  new  con- 
ventions (as  for  example  in  Jerry  Uels- 
mann's  montages,  or  Steven  Shore's 
use  of  color). 

Nevertheless,  whether  the  theorist  is 
a  realist  or  a  conventionalist,  the  view 
is  shared  that  in  ordinary  circum- 
stances the  beholder  views  the  photo- 
graph as  portraying  a  real  event  having 
occurred.  This  is  most  striking  in  those 
cases  of  political  dirty  tricks  in  which 
photographs  are  faked  for  the  pur- 
pose of  embarrassing  a  political  figure 
or  statesman.  There  are  memorable 
examples  from  many  political  cam- 
paigns. These  darkroom  manipula- 
tions are  based  on  the  assumption 
that  viewers  believe  that  what  they 
see  in  photographs  is  a  true  depiction 
of  reality. 

Our  research  program  has  devoted 
two  studies  to  determining  some  fea- 
tures of  the  child's  belief  in  photo- 
graphic fidelity.  In  the  first  of  these 
studies  (O'Connor,  Beilin  &  Kose,  1981), 
we  sought  a  test  of  this  oft-observed 
and  commented  on  phenomenon,  in 
a  condition  that  would  stretch  belief 
in  the  authenticity  of  photographs  to 
the  maximum.  We  reasoned  that  if 
children  could  be  shown  to  believe  in 
the  fidelity  of  photographs  when  the 


56        Harry  Beilin 


photographs  were  of  an  illogical  event, 
even  though  subjects  at  the  same  time 
could  view  the  actual  event,  it  would 
be  very  strong  evidence  for  the  exis- 
tence of  the  belief  in  photographic 
fidelity  in  children.  For  this  purpose 
we  created  an  experimental  condition 
in  which  photographs  depicted  illogi- 
cal events.  We  capitalized  on  the  well- 
known  Piagetian  conservation  of  liq- 
uids task,  in  which  liquid  is  poured 
from  a  low  wide  container  to  a  tall 
narrow  one.  Children  can  be  distin- 
guished by  whether  they  are  able  to 
judge  if  the  amount  has  been  con- 
served (i.e.,  if  the  amount  of  liquid  is 
the  same  or  different  after  the  pour- 
ing). If  they  judge  correctly  they  are 
identified  as  operational  conservers; 
if  not,  they  are  considered  preopera- 
tional. They  might  also  be  transitional 
between  the  two  states,  but  we  omitted 
such  children  from  our  study.  Conser- 
vation is  also  manifest  in  other  quan- 
titative contexts,  and  we  established 
the  cognitive  level  of  our  subjects  in 
a  pretest  by  a  conservation  of  number 
task.  We  set  up  an  experiment  which 
ultimately  had  four  conditions,  and 
200  subjects  approximately  6  years  of 
age.  In  the  first  condition,  subjects 
were  presented  with  a  series  of  color 
photographic  slides  of  a  conservation 
of  liquid  task  that  ended  in  an  illogical 
outcome.  Either  before  or  after  this 
viewing,  they  saw  a  standard  conser- 
vation of  liquid  task  with  the  actual 
materials  that  ended  in  the  standard 
(i.e.,  logical)  fashion.  After  viewing 
both  they  were  asked  first  if  they  saw 
a  difference  between  the  conditions 
and  then  which  was  the  way  the  task 
"really"  should  be  if  they  saw  a  differ- 
ence, either  the  (logical)  materials  or 
the  (illogical)  photographs.  A  sub- 
stantial proportion  of  both  concrete 
operational  (30%)  and  preoperational 
children  (90%)  reported  the  illogical 
photographic  condition  to  reflect  with 
fidelity  the  true  condition.  The  effect 
was  significantly  influenced  by  the 
order  of  presentation  and  the  opera- 


tional level  of  the  child.  That  is,  the 
operational  level  children  resisted  the 
influence  of  the  illogical  photograph, 
particularly  if  the  real  materials  condi- 
tion was  presented  first. 

There  were  three  contrast  or  con- 
trol conditions  in  the  experiment.  In 
one,  subjects  were  presented  with  an 
illogical  conservation  outcome  using 
real  materials  contrasted  with  a  logi- 
cal-outcome photograph.  In  this  case 
fidelity  judgments  were  also  affected 
by  task  presentation  order  and  opera- 
tional level.  In  the  second,  contrast 
condition  subjects  were  presented  with 
two  standard  materials  conservation 
conditions,  one  with  an  illogical  out- 
come, the  other  with  a  logical  out- 
come. In  this  case  the  choice  between 
alternatives  was  random.  In  the  third 
contrast,  we  sought  to  determine 
whether  children  would  have  the  same 
belief  in  fidelity  with  drawings  of  the 
conservation  task  as  they  did  with 
photographs.  We  found  some  evidence 
of  an  effect,  but  the  pattern  of  response 
to  the  drawings  was  different.  First, 
with  drawings  no  children  reported 
that  they  saw  no  difference  between 
the  two  conditions  (whereas  30%  of 
the  concrete  operational  did  so  in  the 
illogical  photographic  condition).  Sec- 
ondly, with  drawings,  substantially 
more  subjects  chose  the  standard  logi- 
cal condition  than  was  true  for  the 
photographic  condition.  Thus,  while 
drawings  elicited  a  belief  that  they 
truly  represented  what  they  depict,  the 
effect  with  photographs  was  signifi- 
cantly more  compelling. 

In  a  further  study  of  photographic 
fidelity  (O'Connor,  1981;  O'Connor, 
Beilin  &  Kose,  1981),  we  took  note  that 
our  first  study  was  based  on  conserva- 
tion task  judgments.  Such  judgments 
are  dependent  to  a  significant  extent, 
or  so  it  has  been  claimed,  upon  knowl- 
edge of  the  physical  properties  en- 
gaged by  that  task,  such  as  knowledge 
of  the  properties  of  continuous  liquids 
and  discontinuous  solids.  Since  such 
knowledge  could  conceivably  influ- 


Photographic  Representation        57 


ence  fidelity  judgments,  we  wished  to 
provide  a  more  stringent  test  of  the 
fidelity  thesis  by  offering  an  experi- 
mental context  in  which  the  task  used 
required  judgments  that  were  more 
logically  based  than  those  of  a  conser- 
vation experiment.  For  this  purpose 
O'Connor  used  a  transitivity  task  (seri- 
ated wooden  blocks)  in  which  logical 
and  illogical  photographs  of  the  task 
were  contrasted  with  actual  physical 
objects.  (In  a  transitivity  task  blocks 
of  heights  A  and  B  are  compared  and 
independently  B  and  C  heights  are 
compared;  then  a  comparative  judg- 
ment of  A  and  C  is  sought  without  the 
blocks  present.)  This  transitivity  study 
shows  that,  as  one  would  expect,  cog- 
nitive level  has  a  consistent  effect 
across  both  conservation  and  transi- 
tivity tasks,  indicating  that  on  the  whole 
more  cognitively  advanced  subjects 
will  resist  the  influence  of  illogical 
photographs  and  preoperational  chil- 
dren will  not.  This  result,  however,  is 
affected  by  presentation  order  which 
interacts  with  the  logicality  of  the 
tasks.  To  isolate  one  effect,  we  found 
that  when  illogical  outcome  materials 
are  paired  with  a  logical  outcome 
photo,  subjects  choose  the  illogical 
materials  as  the  reality  to  a  striking 
extent  (up  to  80%  for  the  operational 
children),  irrespective  of  the  task  pre- 
sented first.  By  contrast,  the  effect  is 
overwhelming  in  the  conservation  task, 
when  the  illogical  standard  materials 
appear  first;  otherwise  choice  between 
the  two  conditions  is  random.  We  are 
inclined  to  interpret  this  finding  as 
indicating  that  the  materials  them- 
selves compel  a  judgment  of  reality, 
even  when  the  photograph  is  more  logi- 
cal and  the  materials  are  in  fact  illogi- 
cal. That  is,  in  a  highly  logically-loaded 
task  like  transitivity,  children  are  in- 
clined to  trust  what  is  materially  pres- 
ent and  distrust  the  photograph.  When 
the  task  entails  more  physical  knowl- 
edge, as  in  the  case  with  conserva- 
tion, they  are  relatively  more  likely  to 
believe  in  the  fidelity  of  the  photo- 


graph, especially  if  the  photo  appears 
first.  Children's  justifications  support 
this  interpretation,  as  do  some  of  the 
other  findings  of  the  study. 

A  third  study,  which  we  consider  a 
pilot  study  and  will  be  conducted  more 
extensively  shortly  (Pearlman  and  Bei- 
lin),  is  concerned  with  what  we  identify 
as  "iconic  realism."  In  this  study  we 
were  concerned  with  when  and  how 
children  come  to  an  understanding  of 
the  properties  of  the  photographic  sur- 
face in  contrast  to  the  properties  of  the 
object  depicted  on  that  surface.  The 
140  subjects  tested  were  3-,  4-,  and 
5-year-olds.  They  were  presented  with 
photographs  of  objects,  such  as,  an 
ice  cream  cone,  a  glass  of  orange  juice, 
a  lighted  candle,  etc.  The  photographs 
varied  in  color  (black/white  vs.  color) 
and  size  (near  life  size  vs.  small).  The 
children  first  identified  the  objects  and 
were  then  asked  whether  the  object  or 
its  photograph  would  continue  to  exist 
if  its  counterpart  were  destroyed  (or 
died).  Lastly,  they  had  to  say  whether 
certain  physical  properties  associated 
with  an  object  were  shared  by  its 
photographic  counterpart.  The  ques- 
tions were  of  the  type  "If  you  got  very 
close  to  this  picture,  could  you  smell  the 
rose?"  "If  it  got  very  hot  in  here,  would 
the  ice  cream  cone  melt?"  "If  I  touched 
the  picture  here,  would  it  feel  cold?" 
etc.  The  child's  responses  were  rated  for 
indicated  iconic  realism  by  whether  the 
child  attributed  properties  to  the  photo- 
graph that  only  the  object  itself  could 
have.  We  see  this  phenomenon  as  par- 
allel to  that  of  Piaget's  notion  of  nominal 
realism  in  which  the  child  believes  that 
names  have  properties  of  the  objects 
they  label.  The  results  showed  that 
80%  of  the  3-year-olds  we  tested  gave 
at  least  3  iconic  realism  responses, 
30%  of  the  4-year-olds  and  11%  of 
the  5-year-olds.  Neither  color  nor  size 
affected  the  results. 

We  interpret  these  findings  as  show- 
ing that  children  only  gradually  dis- 
cover that  the  photograph  has  proper- 
ties of  its  own  (i.e.,  it  is  made  of  paper, 


58        Harry  Beilin 


it  tears,  etc.)  and  does  not  share  criti- 
cal properties  with  the  object  it  depicts 
(e.g.,  has  an  odor  like  a  flower).  At  the 
same  time  there  appears  to  be  a  tenta- 
tiveness  about  their  understanding  in- 
dicated by  the  fact  that  only  one  child 
who  thought  the  ice  cream  cone  pic- 
ture would  be  wet  and  cold  asked  if 
she  could  taste  it. 

A  fourth  study  (Kose,  Beilin  &  O'Con- 
nor, 1980)  was  concerned  with  the 
child's  ability  to  respond  to  the  depic- 
tion of  arrested  action  in  photographs. 
There  were  80  subjects,  3  through  6 
years  of  age,  who  were  asked  to  imi- 
tate the  actions  depicted  in  a  set  of 
12  black  and  white  photographs.  They 
were  also  asked  to  imitate  the  actions 
of  a  live  model  and  provided  a  verbal 
description  of  the  photographs.  The 
actions  of  the  model  that  were  depicted 
were  somewhat  unusual  but  generally 
within  the  capabilities  of  the  child 
(e.g.,  hands  on  hips;  standing  on  one 
foot).  Their  imitations  were  rated  within 
a  range  from  0  to  2.  For  photograph 
imitations,  3-year-olds  had  a  mean 
score  of  .36,  6-year-olds,  1.86,  a  sig- 
nificant difference.  The  live  model  imi- 
tation scores  were  1.29  for  3-year-olds 
and  the  6-year-old  mean  was  1.97,  a 
nonsignificant  difference.  In  respect  to 
verbal  descriptions,  only  52%  of  the 
3-year-olds  could  verbally  identify  ac- 
tions in  the  photographs  in  contrast 
to  94%  of  the  6-year-olds.  Thus,  sub- 
jects were  extracting  more  information 
from  the  photographs  than  they  could 
physically  imitate,  but  at  3  years  the 
ability  to  recognize  and  identify  action 
information  in  photographs  was  far 
less  than  was  the  case  at  a  later  age. 
We  were  interested  to  know,  further, 
whether  the  difficulty  in  extracting  ac- 
tion information  from  photographs  was 
characteristic  of  other  representations. 
To  test  this  we  asked  another  group 
of  3-  to  5-year-olds  to  imitate  the  ac- 
tions depicted  in  line  drawings  and 
dolls  set  in  the  same  poses  as  the  pho- 
tographs. The  imitation  of  both  types 
of  representation   (drawing  and  doll) 


was  superior  to  that  of  the  photo- 
graphs, with  the  imitation  of  the  doll 
approximating  that  of  the  live  model. 
The  data  of  this  study  indicate  that  al- 
though very  young  children  (within 
the  first  year)  can  recognize  objects 
in  photographs,  the  depiction  of  action 
is  a  more  complex  form  of  representa- 
tion and  is  only  progressively  achieved. 
The  final  study  to  be  mentioned 
(Pazer  &  Beilin,  in  preparation)  bears 
on  the  relation  between  photographs 
and  a  person's  developing  self-image. 
Seventy-five  subjects  at  five  age  levels 
were  studied:  7,  17,  30,  50  and  75 
years.  Subjects  within  each  age  group 
were  acquainted  with  one  another. 
Five  4  in.  by  5  in.  black  and  white 
photographs  were  taken  of  each  sub- 
ject in  different  profile  views.  Each  sub- 
ject, a  week  later,  was  shown  14  sets 
of  photographs  from  that  person's  age 
cohort  as  well  as  those  of  him  or  her- 
self and  was  asked  to  rank  them  within 
sets  from  the  most  to  least  attractive. 
Each  subject  was  then  questioned  on 
the  relation  of  the  photograph  to  his 
or  her  own  attractiveness.  Coefficients 
of  concordance  between  each  sub- 
ject's ranking  of  his  own  photographs 
and  the  group's  ranking  of  the  sub- 
ject's photographs  for  attractiveness 
ranged  from  .001  for  the  7-year-olds  to 
thattof  .59  for  the  75-year-olds.  These 
data  are  interpreted  as  indicative  of 
increasing  objective  self  awareness, 
in  that  one's  own  judgments  of  attrac- 
tiveness come  into  closer  accord  with 
others'  judgments  with  increasing  age. 
The  reactions  of  subjects  to  their  own 
photographs  are  of  particular  interest. 
They  show  that  93%  of  the  7-year-old 
subjects  (the  youngest)  thought  their 
photographs  were  attractive.  Only  53% 
of  the  17-year-olds  and  30-year-olds, 
however,  had  the  same  opinions  of 
their  photographs,  probably  indicating 
greater  discrimination  in  their  judg- 
ments. Only  13%  of  the  50-year-olds 
thought  their  photographs  were  attrac- 
tive, reflecting,  it  would  appear,  in- 
creasing displeasure  with  how  their 


Photographic  Representation        59 


physical  features  are  undergoing 
change.  Most  subjects  in  the  75-year- 
old  group  did  not  think  of  themselves 
as  attractive  any  longer;  however,  87% 
of  them  did  think  they  looked  as  attrac- 
tive in  photographs  as  they  did  in 
reality. 

The  studies  I  have  described  quite 
briefly  do  not  exhaust  the  number  in 
which  we  are  engaged,  but  they  give 
a  flavor  of  the  variety  of  issues  with 
which  we  are  concerned.  Basically 
our  interests  range  from  knowledge 
of  how  photographs  come  to  acquire 
meaning  for  the  developing  child,  how 
the  photograph  enters  into  a  system 
of  personal  and  social  conventions, 
and  what  I  have  not  described,  how 
the  photograph  comes  to  serve  an  aes- 
thetic function  in  the  context  of  the 
child's  understanding. 


photographs.  Presented  at  the  Sixth  Bi- 
ennial Southwestern  Conference  on 
Human  Development,  Alexandria,  Va., 
April,  1980. 

O'Connor,  J.  Representation  and  transitiv- 
ity. Unpublished  doctoral  dissertation, 
City  University  of  New  York,  1981. 

O'Connor,  J.,  Beilin,  H.  &  Kose,  G.  The  effect 
of  media  on  logical  operations.  Presented 
at  the  biennial  meetings  of  the  Society 
for  Research  in  Child  Development,  April, 
1981. 

Pazer,  S.  &  Beilin,  H.  The  photograph  is 
"me":  Effect  of  photographs  on  objec- 
tive self  awareness.  Submitted  for  pub- 
lication. 

Snyder,  J.  Picturing  vision.  Critical  Inquiry, 
1980,  6,499-526. 

Sontag,  S.  On  photography  New  York:  Far- 
rar,  Straus  &  Giroux,  1977. 

Worth,  S.  Pictures  can't  say  "ain't."  Versus 
12,  Proceedings  of  the  International  Con- 
ference on  Semiotics,  Milan,  1981. 


References 

Arnheim,  R.  On  the  nature  of  photography. 

Critical  Inquiry,  1974,  1,  149-161. 
Kose,  G.,  Beilin,  H.  &  O'Connor,  J.  Children's 

comprehension  of  actions  depicted   in 


Harry  Beilin 

Graduate  School  and  University  Center 
City  University  of  New  York 
33  West  42nd  Street,  New  York,  N.Y. 
10036 


60        Harry  Beilin 


PROJECT  ZERO:  THE  EVOLUTION  OF  VISUAL  ARTS 
RESEARCH  DURING  THE  SEVENTIES 


Jessie  Lovano-Kerr 
Indiana  University 
Jean  Rush 
The  University  of  Arizona 


Introduction 

Aesthetic  Education 

An  artist  is  a  person  to  whom  society 
often  ascribes  a  certain  freedom  of 
spirit,  who  explores  and  enjoys  the 
nuances  of  his  or  her  world,  who  ex- 
periences the  satisfaction  in  creative 
energy  by  expressing  personal  feelings 
and  ideas  through  the  disciplined  use 
of  words,  paint,  clay,  music,  or  other 
media.  Young  people  who  exercise 
their  creative  and  expressive  skills  will 
demonstrate  those  qualities  in  all  as- 
pects of  their  adult  lives,  no  matter 
what  their  career  choices  may  be.  They 
will  recognize  and  appreciate  unique- 
ness and  quality  wherever  they  find  it 
and  will  become  perceptive  audiences 
who  enjoy  the  arts  all  of  their  lives. 
Teaching  children  to  respond  aestheti- 
cally in  creating  and  appreciating  art 
is  generally  accepted  as  a  major  ob- 
jective in  art  education. 

Educators  have  had  difficulty  in 
specifying  the  content  necessary  for 
the  aesthetic  education  of  children 
during  their  early  years.  The  concept 
of  aesthetic  education  was  first  shaped 
at  the  Whitney  Museum  Conference 
in  1967,  held  jointly  with  the  Rhode 
Island  School  of  Design  and  coordi- 
nated by  Harlan  Hoffa  and  Manuel 
Barkan.  The  conference  was  one  of  17 
developmental  seminars  funded  be- 
tween October,  1964  and  November, 
1966  by  the  Arts  and  Humanities  Pro- 
gram of  the  U.S.  Office  of  Education, 
under  the  direction  of  Kathryn  Bloom. 
The  emphasis  placed  on  research  and 


deveopment  in  aesthetic  education  by 
Stanley  Madeja  at  CEMREL,  Inc.,  the 
national  education  research  labora- 
tory in  St.  Louis;  by  Kathryn  Bloom 
through  the  Arts  in  Education  Pro- 
gram of  the  JDR  3rd  Fund;  and  by 
Howard  Gardner  at  Harvard's  Project 
Zero  are  direct  outgrowths  of  this  con- 
ference that  have  influenced  art  edu- 
cation through  their  years  of  sustained 
research,  theorizing,  and  policy  state- 
ments pertaining  to  aesthetic  educa- 
tion. Their  goal  was  making  aesthetics 
and  the  arts  an  essential  part  of  every 
child's  formal  education  (Bloom,  1977). 

Project  Zero 

One  of  the  early  Arts  and  Humanities 
grants  for  research  in  aesthetic  edu- 
cation was  awarded  in  1966  to  Nelson 
Goodman  (Languages  of  Art,  1968)  of 
the  Harvard  Graduate  School  of  Edu- 
cation. Goodman's  final  report,  "Basic 
Abilities  Required  for  Understanding 
and  Creation  in  the  Arts"  (September, 
1972),  contained  seven  technical  re- 
ports on  topics  such  as  arts  in  alter- 
native schools,  the  theory  of  symbols, 
kinds  of  musical  reference,  and  the 
lecture-performance  as  an  instrument 
for  audience  education  (Murphy  & 
Jones,  1976).  Goodman's  research 
generated  wide  interest  among  arts 
educators  and  began  an  investigation 
that  has  continued  throughout  the  de- 
cade of  the  seventies  under  the  name 
of  Project  Zero. 

Project  Zero,   in   its  fourteenth  year, 
is  unique  in  art  education  for  its  focus, 


61 


funding,  and  tenure.  When  the  project 
began,  arts  education  research  was  in 
its  infancy.  The  name  was  intention- 
ally whimsical.  According  to  the  proj- 
ect's codirectors,  David  N.  Perkins 
(The  Arts  and  Cognition,  1977)  and 
Howard  Gardner  (The  Arts  and  Human 
Development,  1973;  Artful  Scribbles, 
1980),  "the  zero  reflected  our  starting 
point,  our  pessimistic  estimate  of  the 
state  of  general,  communicable  knowl- 
edge about  arts  education.  The  proj- 
ect's aim  was  to  attempt  a  rational 
study  of  artistic  activity;  from  such 
understanding  we  hope  to  devise  con- 
crete recommendations  for  educating 
keen  ears  and  eyes,  creative  minds 
and  hands  from  kindergarten  to  col- 
lege" (Perkins  &  Gardner,  1974,  p.  5). 

The  focus  of  Project  Zero  has  been 
the  developmental  study  of  artistic 
growth,   central  to  which  was  "the 
ability  of  persons  to  use  and  under- 
stand various  kinds  of  symbols.  We 
focused  on  symbol  use  not  only  be- 
cause of  its  importance  in  general  cog- 
nition, nor  even  because  of  its  often- 
neglected  role  in  artistic  process;  rather, 
we  held  a  conviction  that,  through  an 
intensive  exploration  of  such  symbol- 
ization,  fresh  insights  into  the  overall 
educational  process  might  be  attained" 
(Gardner,  1976b).  Project  Zero's  stated 
research  goals  were  as  follows: 
(1)  to  analyze  and  classify  the  types  of 
symbol  systems  and   symbolic  refer- 
ence  characteristic   of  different   art 
forms;  (2)  to  identify  and  study  experi- 
mentally the  skills  and  abilities  required 
for  the  understanding  and  manipula- 
tion of  art  symbols;  and  (3)  to  investi- 
gate methods  of  nurturing  and  training 
those  abilities  generally  and  as  they 
bear  upon  particular  arts.  Although  the 
ultimate  goal  is  improvement  in  art  edu- 
cation, emphasis  throughout  is  on  long 
term,  basic  research,  aiming  at  clarifi- 
cation of  issues,  identification  of  prob- 
lems, and   proposal  of  hypotheses  for 
testing  (Howard,  1971,  p.  64). 

Project  Zero  has  continued  to  re- 
ceive more  or  less  consistent  federal 
funding  over  the  past  10  years  from 


the  U.S.  Office  of  Education,  the  Na- 
tional Science  Foundation,  and  the 
National  Institute  of  Education,  either 
directly  or  through  subcontracts  with 
CEMREL,  Inc.  This  extended  assis- 
tance has  enabled  Gardner  and  his 
associates  to  conduct  longitudinal, 
developmental  research  as  well  as  a 
program  of  sequential,  cross-sectional, 
time-specific  studies  of  such  behaviors 
as  children's  perception  of  painting 
styles  or  children's  understanding  of 
literary  metaphor.  Project  Zero's  con- 
tinuity distinguishes  it  from  its  con- 
temporaries in  art  research,  most  of 
whom  work  on  a  small  scale  without 
support  from  either  the  government 
or  their  colleagues,  an  unfortunate  sit- 
uation that  results  in  a  generally  low 
and  inconsistent  output. 

Gardner,  Goodman,  Perkins,  and 
their  associates  at  Project  Zero  have 
compiled  and  disseminated  a  rela- 
tively broad  body  of  work.  Project 
Zero  from  the  beginning  has  been  an 
interdisciplinary  facility.  Its  spokes- 
men have  constructed  a  thoughtful, 
consistent  philosophical  and  psycho- 
logical framework  integrating  litera- 
ture from  diverse  fields:  cognitive, 
gestalt,  and  developmental  psychol- 
ogy; semiotics;  philosophy;  education; 
and  the  arts.  Their  mentors  include 
Nelson  Goodman,  Rudolf  Arnheim, 
Otto  Rank,  Claude  Levi-Strauss,  Jean 
Piaget,  and  Sigmund  Freud.  Project 
Zero's  multidisciplinary  teams  of  re- 
searchers have  asked  questions  rele- 
vant to  developmental  and  to  educa- 
tional processes  in  the  arts,  a  welcome 
and  innovative  effort  in  both  fields. 
Researchers  have  consulted  the  liter- 
ature in  these  areas  in  depth  and  with 
considerable  insight.  They  have  made 
applications  to  the  study  at  hand  with 
a  sense  of  the  broad  dimensions  under- 
lying this  new  area  and  with  a  gift  for 
synthesizing  fragments  of  knowledge 
into  a  comprehensive  and  appealing 
design  for  artistic  growth. 

The  numerous  publications  from 
Project  Zero  range  in  subject  from 


62 


J.  Lovano-Kerr,  J.  Rush 


brain  damage  and  aphasia  through  the 
study  of  symbolic  learning,  metaphoric 
behavior,  and  the  perception  of  artistic 
style.  They  constitute  a  coherent  body 
of  material  that  has  shaped  the  direc- 
tion of  research  priorities  and  policy 
in  aesthetic  (arts)  education  to  a  pro- 
digious extent  over  the  past  10  years. 

The  official  list  of  publications  from 
Project  Zero  for  the  years  1970-1979 
contains  150  articles  that  have  ap- 
peared in  books  and  journals,  six 
books  written,  and  three  books  edited 
by  the  personnel  associated  with  the 
project  in  either  single  or  multiple  au- 
thorship. Of  the  150  articles,  Gardner 
et  al.  published  102;  Perkins  et  al.,  29; 
Goodman,  Perkins,  and  Gardner  to- 
gether, 3;  and  16  were  written  by  other 
associates.  Gardner  alone  wrote  five 
books  during  that  period  and  edited 
three  more  in  multiple  editorship; 
Perkins  edited  a  book  with  a  col- 
league. This  is  indeed  an  impressive 
record  of  scholarly  productivity. 

Project  Zero's  own  subject  classifi- 
cation of  the  150  articles  show  that 
they  cluster  around  the  following 
topics:  brain  damage,  32;  visual  arts, 
17;  aesthetics,  13;  visual  perception, 
13;  metaphor,  12;  literary  arts,  10;  early 
symbolization,  8;  developmental  theory, 
7;  artistic  development,  7;  Project  Zero, 
7;  arts  education,  7;  music,  6;  miscel- 
laneous theoretical  research,  6;  crea- 
tive and  problem-solving  processes,  3; 
and  miscellaneous  experimental  re- 
search, 3. 

Project  Zero  and  Visual 
Arts  Education 

The  education  of  visual  artists  tradi- 
tionally has  been  undertaken  by  artists, 
and  this  tradition  outdates  the  investi- 
gation of  artistic  learning  by  psychol- 
ogists and  educators  from  other  disci- 
plines. Empirical  research  in  the  visual 
arts  dates  from  the  end  of  World  War  II. 
All  art  researchers,  including  those  at 
Project  Zero,  have  borrowed  proce- 
dures and  philosophical  models  from 


allied  fields.  Some  of  them  have  proved 
appropriate  and  some  cumbersome 
when  applied  to  the  visual  arts. 

The  primary  spokesmen  for  Project 
Zero  hale  from  outside  the  profession 
known  as  art  education.  It  comes  as  no 
surprise,  therefore,  to  hear  that  their 
research  interests  and  those  of  art 
educators  have  often  overlapped  but 
have  not  always  had  the  same  focus. 
Because  of  Project  Zero's  prominent 
interest  in  the  visual  arts,  its  unique 
governmental  research  support,  and 
its  demonstrated  influence  on  visual 
art  education  policy  during  the  past 
10  years,  a  brief  review  of  Project 
Zero's  publications  that  touch  on  the 
visual  arts  may  clarify  the  nature  of  its 
contributions,  as  well  as  point  up  the 
discrepancy  between  its  interests  and 
those  of  some  other  art  education  re- 
searchers. Such  an  examination  has 
not  yet  appeared  in  the  art  education 
literature. 

In  this  paper  we  review  selected  pub- 
lications by  Project  Zero  personnel. 
The  review  will  focus  on  literature  re- 
lated to  children's  artistic  development 
in  four  areas:  (1)  responding  to  art; 
(2)  making  art;  (3)  symbol  use;  and 
(4)  cultural  influences.  We  have  based 
our  comments  on  a  survey  of  the  litera- 
ture dealing  primarily  with  normal  pop- 
ulations, that  treat  all  of  the  arts  and 
the  visual  arts  in  particular,  and  on 
evaluations  of  Project  Zero's  progress. 
This  is  only  about  a  third  of  the  Proj- 
ect's total  publications.  We  have  not 
dealt  extensively  with  the  theoretical 
or  philosophical  constructs  underlying 
Project  Zero  research  nor,  except  in 
certain  particulars,  with  the  careful 
attempts  to  articulate  broad  models  of 
artistic  development. 

Although  Project  Zero  grew  from 
the  work  of  Nelson  Goodman  and  his 
philosophical  contributions  are  evi- 
dent, Howard  Gardner  has  clearly  set 
the  pace  and  direction  of  Project  Zero 
with  his,  his  associates',  and  his  stu- 
dents' research  and  the  conclusions 
drawn  from  them.  Gardner's  particular 


Project  Zero:  Evolution  of  Research        63 


interest  in  the  visual  arts  is  evident  by 
the  amount  of  his  published  work  in 
this  area.  The  following  remarks,  there- 
fore, will  apply  most  directly  to  Gard- 
ner's books  and  articles  included  in 
the  list  of  references. 

Responding  to  Art 

Thirteen  of  the  surveyed  journal  arti- 
cles examine  children's  responses  to 
viewing  a  work  of  art  (Gardner,  1970a, 
1970b,  1971,  1972a,  1972b,  1972c,  1974; 
Gardner  &  Gardner,  1970,  1973;  Gard- 
ner, Winner,  &  Kircher,   1975;   Rosen- 
stiel,  Morison,  Silverman,  &  Gardner, 
1978;  Silverman,  Winner,  &  Gardner, 
1976;  Silverman,  Winner,  Rosenstiel,  & 
Gardner,   1975).  This  is  a  sequential 
series;  six  of  the  13  are  progressive 
empirical  research  studies  that  docu- 
ment children's  sensitivity  to  painting 
style,  children's  conceptions  of  the 
arts,  their  development  of  critical  judg- 
ment, and  the  role  of  texture  in  picture 
perception.  This  research  has  led  Proj- 
ect Zero   researchers  to  construct  a 
cohesive  view  of  children's  develop- 
ing visual  capabilities  when  confront- 
ing complex  figures  such  as  artworks 
and  to  identify  features  of  the  pro- 
cesses involved.  Although  the  first 
study  simply  attempted  to  ascertain 
children's  classificatory  behavior  and 
degree  of  flexibility  at  varying  develop- 
mental levels,  questions  raised  there 
led  to  the  formulation  of  subsequent 
experimental  tasks  that  explored  the 
effects  of  training  on  style  sensitivity. 
This  depth  of  focus  is  unique  in  art 
education   research  and  deserves  our 
commendation  for  setting  an  example 
of  continuity,  productivity,  and  contri- 
bution to  our  knowledge  of  children's 
artistic  behavior. 

Style  Sensitivity 

To  assign  a  painting  to  an  artist  on  the 
basis  of  style,  a  viewer  must  recognize 
certain  properties  or  dimensions  that 
the  works  of  one  artist  have  in  common. 


Since  each  painting  is  an  intricate 
entity  containing  a  distinct  pattern 
of  relationships  between  its  elements, 
verbalization  of  style  dimensions 
often  inadequately  describes  the 
visual  experience  (cf.  Arnheim,  1969; 
Schapiro,  1972).  Some  researchers  in- 
dependent of  Project  Zero  have  sug- 
gested that  adults  and  children  can 
learn  to  make  successful  style  judg- 
ments (Bengston,  Schoeller,  &  Cohen 
1979;  DePorter  &  Kavanaugh,  1979 
Rush,  1979;  Tighe,  1968;  Walk,  1967 
Walk,  Karusaitis,  Lebowitz,  &  Falbo, 
1971),  but  most  have  studied  adults 
and  none  has  pursued  the  matter  so 
consistently  as  Gardner  and  his  asso- 
ciates. 

Gardner  operationalized  style  sen- 
sitivity as  "the  ability  to  group  to- 
gether works  produced  by  one  artist" 
(1972c,  p.  326).  Most  of  the  tasks  re- 
quired children  to  sort  picture-post- 
card-sized reproductions  of  paintings 
or,  on  one  occasion,  to  view  slides 
made  from  these  reproductions.  Sen- 
sitivity was  measured  by  children's 
ability  to  choose  an  example  of  a 
painter's  work  from  an  array  of  four 
reproductions,  one  of  which  was  by 
the  target  artist  and  three  by  other 
painters;  or  children  were  asked  to 
pair  two  pictures  by  one  artist  despite 
misleading  cues.  Subjects  were  upper 
to  lower  middle  class  children  enrolled 
in  schools  in  the  suburban  Boston 
area. 

In  his  first  study  Gardner  (1970a) 
tested  20  first-graders  (6-year-olds), 
20  third-graders  (8-year-olds),  20  sixth- 
graders  (11/12-year-olds),  and  20  ninth- 
graders  (14-year-olds)  to  determine 
their  sensitivity  to  individual  painting 
style.  Gardner  trained  the  children  to 
observe  two  works  by  one  artist  and 
then  to  choose  one  work  by  the  same 
artist  contained  in  an  array  of  four 
reproductions.  For  testing,  children 
repeated  this  task  20  times,  receiving 
reinforcement  or  corrective  feedback 
on  four  of  the  early  trials.  By  his  choice 
of  reproductions  Gardner  attempted  to 


64 


J.  Lovano-Kerr,  J.  Rush 


determine  whether  subject  matter 
would  provide  a  miscue.  Five  arrays 
contained  no  recognizable  subject 
matter  (abstractions),  five  contained 
homogeneous  subject  matter  (portraits 
of  individuals),  and  10  contained  het- 
erogeneous subject  matter. 

When  subject  matter  was  either  con- 
trolled (portraits)  or  absent  (abstrac- 
tions), children  of  all  ages  sorted  by 
style.  However,  the  adolescent  chil- 
dren (ninth-graders)  displayed  signifi- 
cantly more  sensitivity  than  all  of  the 
preadolescents  on  items  containing  a 
variety  of  subjects;  younger  children 
were  misled  by  details  of  the  subject 
and  mistook  them  for  style  cues.  Gard- 
ner observed  that  the  ninth-graders 
may  have  profited  from  prior  exposure 
to  art  and  that  the  younger  children 
may  have  misinterpreted  the  task.  He 
acknowledged  that  the  older  children 
performed  better  because  they  already 
had  a  concept  of  style  as  features 
unique  to  the  work  of  one  individual, 
but  initially  he  ascribed  this  to  develop- 
mental changes  occurring  between  the 
sixth  and  ninth  grades. 

Since  first-  and  sixth-graders  were 
equally  misled  by  various  subject  mat- 
ter miscues  in  the  beginning  study, 
Gardner  modified  the  original  task  in 
a  subsequent  experiment  with  first- 
graders  (6-year-olds)  and  sixth-grad- 
ers (12-year-olds).  To  minimize  the 
misleading  effects  of  subject  matter, 
Gardner  added  one  test  in  which  chil- 
dren identified  the  original  stimulus 
cards  turned  upside  down,  and  one  in 
which  they  used  the  original  cards 
from  which  he  had  removed  mislead- 
ing examples  during  training;  chil- 
dren viewed  the  more  typical  work  of 
each  artist,  instead  of  two  works  as 
they  had  before.  The  younger  and  older 
children  again  displayed  similar  diffi- 
culty with  subject  miscues  on  the  origi- 
nal task.  The  sixth-graders,  however, 
demonstrated  significantly  more  style 
sensitivity  than  the  first-graders  in  the 
two  modified  conditions.  Sixth-grade 
girls  outperformed  boys,  replicating  a 


finding  seen  in  the  first  study  with  that 
age  group.  Gardner  concluded  that  the 
modifications  drew  the  children's  at- 
tention away  from  the  subject  matter 
and  improved  their  focus  on  features 
germaine  to  style  recognition  such  as 
color,  texture,  and  composition.  Gard- 
ner ascribed  the  superior  performance 
of  the  older  children,  especially  the 
girls,  to  developmental  changes  asso- 
ciated with  the  start  of  adolescence. 

Gardner  and  Gardner  (1970)  then  re- 
examined style  sensitivity  on  a  task 
containing  deliberate  subject  miscues. 
Working  with   first-graders   (6-year- 
olds),  sixth-graders  (11-year-olds),  and 
college  sophomores  (19-year-olds), 
they  asked  subjects  to  sort  cards  con- 
taining four  painting   reproductions, 
two  by  one  artist  and  two  by  a  second. 
Each  pair  by  each  artist  contained  the 
same  subject  matter.  In  the  first  task 
subjects  were  to  group  together  the 
cards  that  they  found  most  similar;  in 
the  second  they  were  to  group  the 
cards  according  to  artist  (by  style).  Stu- 
dents of  all  ages  successfully  grouped 
by  subject  matter,  a  strategy  that  the 
authors  interpreted  as  the  more  natu- 
ral tendency  and  the  tendency  more 
reinforced  by  cultural  factors.  The 
youngest  children  again  were  unable 
to   ignore  subject  matter  when   in- 
structed to  group  according  to  artist 
(painting  style).  The  ability  of  older 
subjects  to  sort  by  style  was  taken  to 
indicate 
their  felxibility,  alertness  to  instructions, 
and  awareness  that  a  person  may  leave 
consistent  traces  throughout  his  works 
even  though  manifest  subjects  matter 
and  figure  are  basically  altered.  Appar- 
ently the  youngest  subjects  are  lacking 
in  one  or  more  of  these  capacities.  The 
initial  study  did  indicate  that  when  sub- 
ject matter  was  not  available  as  a  mis- 
cue,  young  subjects  responded  much 
like  older  ones.  Thus  it  is  conceivable 
that  younger  subjects  have  the  poten- 
tial to  perceive  style  but  that  they  are 
impeded  by  their  proclivity  toward  not- 
ing subject  matter  and  deeming  it  a 
sufficient  (or  even  a  necessary)  basis 


Project  Zero:  Evolution  of  Research        65 


for  classification.  In  addition,  instruc- 
tions referring  to  works  by  a  painter 
may  well  be  devoid  of  meaning  for 
young  children;  in  efforts  currently 
underway  to  train  children  to  sort  by 
style  rather  than  by  dominant  figure, 
verbal  instructions  have  been  avoided 
(p.  15). 

No  sex  differences  were  noted  at 
any  age  level. 

Gardner  (1972a)  then  set  out  to  deter- 
mine whether  second-graders  (7-year- 
olds)  and  fifth-graders  (10-year-olds) 
could  learn  to  sort  painting  reproduc- 
tions successfully  according  to  style 
despite  misleading  subject  matter  cues. 
Gardner  hypothesized  that  either 
younger  children  performed  less  well 
than  older  ones  because  of  a  deficit 
in  operational  thinking,  in  which  case 
a  training  program  would  be  ineffec- 
tive, or  younger  children  had  diffi- 
culty making  use  of  information  al- 
ready at  their  disposal,  in  which  case 
training  might  reveal  considerable 
style  sensitivity. 

Children  sorted  sets  of  four  painting 
reproductions,  two  by  one  artist  and 
two  by  another.  Each  set  of  four  con- 
tained two  pairs,  each  pair  having  one 
painting  by  each  artist  that  shared  ob- 
vious subject  matter  (figural  prop- 
erties). The  sets  were  controlled  to 
minimize  other  cues  based  on  color, 
size,  medium,  etc.  Children  received, 
at  weekly  intervals,  a  pretest,  seven 
sessions  of  unspecified  length  to  prac- 
tice sorting  paintings  either  by  sub- 
ject or  by  style,  a  repetition  of  the  pre- 
test as  a  posttest,  and  then  a  repetition 
of  the  posttest  with  instructions  to  sort 
according  to  the  alternate  criterion. 
The  younger  children  also  took  four 
of  Piaget's  tests  of  concrete  opera- 
tional thought. 

Training  produced  a  high  level  of 
sensitivity  in  both  age  groups,  al- 
though the  fifth-graders  performed 
significantly  better  than  the  second- 
graders.  Concrete  operations  ap- 
peared unnecessary  for  stylistic  sen- 
sitivity among  the  younger  children, 


most  of  whom  sorted  well  by  style  but 
had  not  yet  reached  the  stage  of  con- 
crete operations.  No  performance 
differences  occurred  that  were  re- 
lated to  the  sex  of  the  participants. 
The  criterion  reversal  test  revealed 
that  older  children  who  learned  to  sort 
by  subject  matter  also  could  sort  by 
style  as  well  as  those  trained  to  do  so, 
but  that  the  first-graders  could  not. 

Gardner  concluded  that  "style  sen- 
sitivity may  be  more  closely  related 
to  discrimination  learning  or  to  the 
discovery  of  distinctive  features  than 
to  class  inclusion  or  conservation" 
(p.  613).  He  noted  that  "a  training 
paradigm  can  alter  the  basis  on  which 
[children]  group  works  of  art"  (p. 
614),  and  he  continued  to  surmise  that 
the  superior  performance  of  the  older 
children  appeared  due  to  "the  devel- 
opmental changes  which  occur  dur- 
ing the  pre-adolescent  period"  (p. 
614). 

The  training  study  allowed  Gardner 
to  observe  that  the  strategies  used  in 
style  sorting  focused  "on  the  material 
within  the  picture,  disregarded]  the 
most  obvious  figural  aspects,  and  at- 
tended]   to    corrections"    (p.    613). 
Global  impressions  seemed  important, 
and  texture  appeared  to  be  a  signifi- 
cant style  cue,  a  finding  that  Gardner 
later  confirmed  experimentally  (1972b). 
Gardner  hypothesized  (after  Lorenz, 
1966)  that  "pre-adolescents  can  form 
Gestalten  for  certain  artists,  styles,  or 
textures"  (p.  613)  by  focusing  on  the 
essential  attributes  of  a  class  of  stimuli. 
Gardner  distinguished   in  particular 
between  sensitivity  to  objects  and  sen- 
sitivity to  persons. 
Until  middle  childhood,  sensitivity  to 
objects  appears  to  dominate  over  sen- 
sitivity to  persons,  regardless  of  the 
nature  of  the  instructions  or  task.  .  .  . 
one  can  classify  consistently  by  style 
(rather  than  by  subject  matter  or  domi- 
nant figure)  only  when  one  is,  in  some 
sense,  aware  that  a  person  can  leave 
traces  of  his  own  behavior  in  a  variety 
of  places  and  ways.  I  also  propose  that 
response  to  aesthetic  objects  rests  in 


66 


J.  Lovano-Kerr,  J.  Rush 


part  on  the  knowledge  that  they  were 
made  by,  and  expressive  of,  individuals 
(Gardner,  1971,  pp.  519-520). 

A  subsequent  training  study  by 
Silverman,  Winner,  Rosenstiel,  and 
Gardner  (1975)  sought  "to  determine 
the  steps  through  which  children  pass 
in  learning  to  sort  paintings  by  style" 
(p.  373)  and  to  examine  the  effect  of 
style  learning  on  drawing.  Assuming 
that  preadolescent  children  are  char- 
acteristically insensitive  to  stylistic 
properties  without  training,  the  au- 
thors confronted  the  question  of  how 
style  sensitivity  might  relate  to  other 
cognitive,  perceptual,  and  artistic  ca- 
pacities. A  secondary  investigation 
concerned  whether  or  not  a  concept 
of  style  is  best  acquired  by  seeing  a 
broad  range  of  periods  and  artists  or 
by  seeing  fewer  periods  and  artists 
but  more  examples  of  each. 

After  an  initial  pretest  to  determine 
style  sensitivity  and  drawing  ability, 
four  groups  of  fifth-grade  children  (10- 
year-olds)  received  the  following  treat- 
ments: two  groups  learned  to  sort 
painting  reproductions  according  to 
style  of  individual  artist,  one  by  look- 
ing at  a  wide  number  of  artists  and 
periods  (extensive  training)  and  one 
by  looking  at  a  limited  number  (inten- 
sive training);  one  group  learned  to 
recognize  pictures  of  closely  related 
animals;  a  control  group  received  no 
training  at  all.  Following  treatments, 
all  children  took  an  extensive  and  an 
intensive  style-sensitivity  posttest  us- 
ing Western  painting  reproductions 
similar  to  those  used  in  training;  a 
posttest  classifying  animal  pictures;  a 
style-sensitivity  posttest  using  non- 
Western  painting  reproductions;  and 
a  drawing  test. 

On  the  extensive  posttest  both  the 
intensive-trained  and  the  extensive- 
trained  children  recognized  individual 
painting  styles  significantly  better  than 
the  animal-trained  and  control-group 
children,  with  girls  performing  better 
than  boys.  There  was  no  significant 
performance  difference  between  the 


extensive  and  intensive  training 
groups,  and  members  of  the  animal 
training  group  performed  only  mini- 
mally better  than  children  used  as  con- 
trols. On  the  intensive  posttest,  how- 
ever, the  intensive-trained  children 
were  more  sensitive  to  style  than  were 
children  in  any  of  the  other  groups, 
indicating  that  "intensive  training  with 
a  few  salient  painting  styles  emerges 
as  a  more  potent  regimen  than  train- 
ing with  a  wide  variety  of  styles"  (p. 
378).  Some  changes  were  seen  in  post- 
test  drawings  produced  by  children 
who  studied  painting  styles,  chiefly  in 
more  varied  use  of  texture,  color  ef- 
fects, and  use  of  light  and  shadow,  al- 
though the  results  here  were  not  par- 
ticularly strong.  One  reason  might  be 
the  confusion  reported  among  the  chil- 
dren concerning  observed  differences 
between  "the  small  untextured  repro- 
ductions used  in  the  study  and  actual 
paintings"  (p.  380). 

Responding  to  Art:  Some 
Critical  Observations 

Gardner's  reports  of  these  first  four 
style  studies  emphasize  developmental 
patterns,  an  interpretation  of  the  data 
that,  we  suggest,  may  profit  from  fur- 
ther scrutiny.  Certain  effects  ascribed 
to  developmental  changes  actually  may 
be  due  to  the  influence  of  research 
methodology,  such  as  the  tasks  or 
training  used,  the  kind  and  use  of 
visual  stimuli,  and  method  of  eliciting 
children's  verbal  responses;  or  to  the 
effects  of  environmental  factors,  such 
as  children's  cultural  backgrounds, 
exposure  to  mass  media,  or  formal 
education. 

Training.  The  first  study  on  style 
(Gardner,  1970a)  suggested  that  young 
children,  but  not  older  ones,  charac- 
teristically classify  paintings  accord- 
ing to  subject  rather  than  style,  a  con- 
clusion stated  as  an  axiom  in  most  of 
Gardner's  subsequent  work.  This  age 
group  later  overcame  that  tendency  as 
a  result  of  training  (Gardner,  1972a). 


Project  Zero:  Evolution  of  Research        67 


Since  we  know  that  untrained  adults, 
although  capable  of  style  distinctions, 
recognize  individual  styles  only  after 
training  (Rush,  1979),  and  that  subject 
matter  also  poses  misleading  cues  for 
adolescents  (Gardner,  1974),  lack  of 
sensitivity  to  style  seems  consistent 
in  all  untrained  subjects  despite  age. 
Concluding  that  young  children's  sort- 
ing preferences  for  subject  matter  dif- 
fer in  any  respect  from  adults'  prefer- 
ences, or  that  these  preferences  are  a 
developmental  phenomenon,  appears 
unwarranted  on  the  basis  of  Gardner's 
own  research.  Despite  evidence  to  the 
contrary,  the  assumption  that  young 
children  are  insensitive  to  style  con- 
tinues to  figure  conspicuously  in  Gard- 
ner's recent  work. 

It  seems  likely  that  the  so-called  in- 
sensitivity  of  the  younger  children  in 
Gardner's  early  studies,  particularly 
the  first  three,  resulted  from  the  fact 
that  they  were  operating  without  the 
benefit  of  training.  In  the  first  study 
(Gardner,  1970a),  children  examined 
two  examples  of  one  artist's  work  be- 
fore selecting  a  third  on  the  basis  of 
style,  and  they  received  feedback  dur- 
ing the  early  part  of  the  test.  Given 
later  findings  that  young  children  per- 
formed well  with  more  adequate  train- 
ing, it  might  be  said  that  the  first  study 
used  an  inefficient  training  paradigm 
that  penalized  younger,  less  experi- 
enced subjects  by  allowing  the  prior 
education  of  older  children,  whether 
formal  or  informal,  to  influence  the 
results.  Style  concepts  are  learned  by 
seeing  examples,  and,  as  Silverman 
and  her  associates  (1975)  suggested, 
learned  best  by  exposure  to  many  ex- 
amples of  the  same  style  (intensive 
training).  Style  training  in  the  initial 
study  was  ineffective  also  in  the  sense 
that,  as  Gardner  observed,  the  younger 
children  did  not  possess  the  concept 
of  style  as  features  unique  to  one 
individual. 

All  of  the  first  three  studies  (Gardner, 
1 970a,  1 970b;  Gardner  &  Gardner,  1 970) 
are  deficient  in  these  same  areas.  In 


Gardner's  1972a  training  experiment, 
on  the  other  hand,  young  children 
learned  both  the  concept  of  style  and 
concepts  of  individual  painting  styles. 
The  criterion  reversal  test  suggested 
that  the  experience  of  older  children 
remained  an  advantage  in  this  condi- 
tion, since  training  in  the  alternative 
way  of  sorting  was  minimal. 

Given  this  evidence  of  the  variable 
effects  of  training,  developmental  in- 
terpretation of  these  data  seems  ill 
advised  until  training  paradigms  have 
been  refined  so  that  their  influence 
may  be  identified  and  sifted  out.  Gard- 
ner, however,  has  constructed  later 
experiments  around  developmental 
hypotheses  derived  from  these  four 
studies,  apparently  with  little  critical 
evaluation  of  his  research  design  even 
when  confronted  by  his  own  data.  Sub- 
sequent work  has  failed  to  come  to 
grips  with  this  essential  defect. 

Visual  Stimuli.  The  visual  stimuli 
used  in  all  of  the  style  studies,  with 
the  possible  exception  of  those  in  the 
study  on  children's  conceptions  of  the 
arts  (Gardner  et  al.,  1975),  have  been 
3x5-inch  color  reproductions  of  paint- 
ings. Their  limitations  also  may  have 
affected  children's  performance  on 
style  recognition  tasks.  Calling  these 
reproductions  paintings,  for  example, 
may  have  caused  some  misunderstand- 
ing on  the  part  of  the  children  to  whom 
they  were  shown.  Silverman  et  al. 
(1975)  reported  that  many  children 
"seemed  confused  about  the  differ- 
ence between  the  small  untextured 
reproductions  used  in  the  study  and 
actual  paintings"  (p.  30),  but  that  their 
confusion  subsided  as  training  pro- 
gressed. Although  this  issue  is  not 
discussed  anywhere  in  the  Project  Zero 
literature  reviewed,  in  reporting  the 
results  of  all  of  the  studies  the  authors 
frequently  refer  to  the  stimuli  as  paint- 
ings, an  inaccurate  use  of  the  word 
confusing  to  their  readers  as  well  as 
to  their  experimental  subjects.  It  is 
conceivable  that  children  in  all  of  the 
studies  from   1970  on,  expecially  the 


68 


J.  Lovano-Kerr,  J.  Rush 


younger  ones,  misunderstood  this  mis- 
leading term.  Older  children  could  be 
expected  to  know  that  the  painting  to 
which  the  experimenter  referred  was 
a  much  larger  real  object  represented 
by  the  3x5  reproduction  used  in  the 
identification  task.  Younger  children 
apparently  had  difficulty  making  the 
distinction.  In  Project  Zero's  recent 
study  of  critical  judgment  (Rosenstiel, 
Morrison,  Silverman,  &  Gardner,  1978) 
a  third-grader,  observing  the  3x5  pic- 
ture, remarked  "it's  hard  to  paint 
things  so  small"  (p.  100). 

An  example  of  the  ambiguity  that 
these  mislabeled  reproductions  caused 
occurs  in  the  later  study  of  children's 
conceptions  of  the  arts.  Gardner,  Win- 
ner, and  Kircher  (1975)  reported  that 
the  youngest  group,  "When  presented 
with  a  painting  and  asked  to  explain 
where  it  came  from"  (p.  65),  answered 
"the  factory,  ...  a  store,  a  book,  a 
school,  a  camera"  (p.  65).  All  of  these 
responses  describe  reproductions.  The 
authors,  however,  considered  them  to 
be  immature  and  concluded  that  "the 
human  origin  of  a  painting  was  not 
apparent  to  these  children"  (p.  65), 
and  that  they  had  "fundamental  mis- 
conceptions about  art"  (p.  64).  Whether 
the  children  viewed  reproductions  or 
actual  paintings  is  unclear,  since  the 
authors  cited  prior  studies  in  which 
the  term  painting  had  been  used  con- 
sistently to  refer  to  reproductions.  The 
authors  stated  that  young  children 
have  "succeeded  in  .  .  .  grouping  paint- 
ings by  style"  (p.  60)  and  that  a  "young 
child  who  can  look  closely  at  two  Im- 
pressionist paintings  and  detect  fine 
textural  differences  between  a  Renoir 
and  a  Bonnard  [a  reference  to  post- 
card-sized-reproductions]  may  reveal, 
when  questioned,  startling  misconcep- 
tions about  what  a  work  of  art  is,  how 
it  is  made,  or  what  distinguishes  it 
from  a  machine-made  or  a  natural  ob- 
ject" (p.  60).  If  Gardner  et  al.  used  re- 
productions, they  misinterpreted  the 
children's  answers;  if  they  used  real 


paintings,  their  inaccurate  use  of  lan- 
guage obscured  that  important  infor- 
mation. 

In  addition  one  must  question  the 
meaning  of  children's  responses  to 
reproductions  as  small  as  3x5  inches 
and  the  validity  of  generalizing  from 
them  to  responses  that  would  be  gen- 
erated by  a  real  artwork.  Visual  quality 
suffers  in  any  small  reproduction,  and 
the  size  disparity  between  Gardner's 
stimuli  and  most  real  paintings  is  large. 
Evidence  of  these  visual  misinterpreta- 
tions suggests  a  weakness  in  the  early 
works  needing  further  interpretation 
and  correction.  Children's  responses 
on  future  tasks  assessing  aesthetic  qual- 
ities might  differ  if  investigators  were 
to  employ  real  paintings  or,  at  least, 
high  quality  color  slides  projected 
close  to  actual  size. 

The  study  comparing  intensive  and 
extensive  training  (Silverman  et  al., 
1975)  touched  on  yet  another  facet  of 
style  recognition  and  stimulus  use 
without  identifying  it  as  such.  Some 
paintings  are  more  typical  of  a  style 
than  others,  that  is,  they  contain  more 
style  information.  Paintings  from  one 
artist  (Picasso)  vary  along  this  dimen- 
sion as  well  as  paintings  from  one  cul- 
tural style  (Cubism).  Adults  have 
greater  difficulty  in  recognizing  some 
works  that  others  (Rush  &  Sabers,  Note 
1),  which  suggests  that  the  examples 
selected  can  facilitate  or  hinder  style 
learning.  Project  Zero  researchers 
mentioned  this  variable  but  neither 
attempted  to  control  it  nor  discussed 
it  as  a  possible  source  of  error. 

Prior  Experience.  Project  Zero  re- 
searchers seldom  mention  either  the 
educational  environment  of  its  sub- 
jects or  the  findings  of  other  research 
on  the  efficacy  of  teaching  in  the  visual 
arts.  The  study  of  children's  concep- 
tions of  the  arts  (Gardner  et  al.,  1975) 
is  such  a  case.  Gardner  and  his  asso- 
ciates showed  children  a  work  of  visual 
art  (whether  real  or  reproduced  is  un- 
clear),  read  them  a  poem,  or  played 


Project  Zero:  Evolution  of  Research 


69 


them  recorded  music.  Interviewers 
then  asked  the  children  questions  de- 
signed to  elicit  unbiased  answers,  such 
as  "Where  did  it  come  from?  What  else 
might  you  call  it?  Did  you  like  it?"  (p. 
62)  and  stressed  to  the  children  that 
there  were  no  right  or  wrong  re- 
sponses. 

By  questioning  121  children  ranging 
from  4  to  16  years  of  age,  the  authors 
identified  broad  patterns  or  stages  of 
thought  at  three  age  levels.  "There  was 
a  set  of  'immature'  responses  found 
among  54  four-  to  seven-year-olds,  an- 
other set  of  'intermediate'  or  'transi- 
tional' responses  found  among  the  58 
eight-  to  twelve-year-olds,  and  a  final 
set  of  'mature'  responses  found  among 
the  16  fourteen-  to  sixteen-year-olds. 
The  authors  view[ed]  each  set  of  re- 
sponses as  representing  a  certain  cog- 
nitive stage  and  as  having  certain  basic 
characteristics  or  properties"  (Rosario, 
1977,  p.  93).  Gardner  et  al.  identified 
these  stages  of  thought  as  neither 
taught  nor  imitated,  but  considered 
them  spontaneous  constructions  at 
certain  developmental  levels.  Because 
of  the  consistency  of  subject  responses 
to  specific  questions,  they  concluded 
that  there  is  a  "substantial  universal 
component  in  children's  artistic  con- 
ception" (p.  75). 

This  conclusion  ignores  possible 
effects  of  the  children's  experience 
(or  lack  of  it).  Gardner  and  his  asso- 
ciates recognized  that  children's  con- 
ceptions of  the  arts  may  not  reflect 
"the  way  in  which  they  think  about 
the  world  in  general"  (p.  74)  because 
the  arts  "pose  problems  which  seem 
to  be  non-generalizable  ones"  (p.  74), 
such  as  diverse  media,  each  with  its 
own  characteristics;  the  contrast  be- 
tween children's  lack  of  direct  fine 
arts  experiences  and  their  greater  fa- 
miliarity with  the  physical  and  moral 
universe;  art  experiences  mediated  by 
mass  technology;  parental  prejudices 
about  art  as  either  elitist  or  recrea- 
tional; and  the  prevalent  bias  among 
untrained  adults  that  the  arts  are  too 


sophisticated  and  therefore  beyond 
understanding.  Nowhere  do  the  au- 
thors address  these  issues. 

Formal  education  is  bound  to  influ- 
ence children's  responses  in  research 
situations.  Unlike  academic  subjects, 
art  as  a  course  of  study  is  inconsistent. 
Recognition  of  this  fluctuation  of  prior 
art  experiences  is  crucial  to  interpret 
any  data  on  artistic  development.  Older 
children,  for  example,  gave  responses 
that  implied  personal  acquaintance 
with  art  concepts  and  skills  that  could 
reflect  training  under  an  art  specialist, 
a  typical  learning  situation  in  junior 
and  senior  high  schools.  At  the  ele- 
mentary level,  however,  most  art  ex- 
periences are  designed  and  taught  by 
classroom  teachers  who  have  limited 
art  background.  Since  few  art  text- 
books or  mandated  curricula  are  used 
in  the  elementary  school,  there  is  little 
content  or  pedagogical  consistency 
across  elementary  school  populations. 
The  youngest  subjects  in  this  study, 
therefore,  may  have  had  less  exposure 
to  art  than  the  older  children.  Artistic 
development  should  be  considered  in 
terms  of  the  opportunities  a  child  has 
to  learn. 

Rosario  (1977)  critiqued  the  study 
on  children's  conceptions  of  the  arts 
from  an  ethnomethodological  point  of 
view.  Rosario  also  doubted  that  the 
data  allowed  Gardner  et  al.  to  infer  the 
existence  of  congitive  stages,  let  alone 
whether  they  are  spontaneous  con- 
structions. He  pointed  out  that  the 
study  was  designed  not  to  collect  data 
on  how  children  acquire  knowledge 
of  the  arts  but,  rather,  to  investigate 
what  children  think  about  the  arts. 
Rosario  examined  the  questions  used 
in  the  interviewing  process  from  the 
perspective  of  how  the  children  might 
have  interpreted  them.  He  noted  that 
Gardner's  questions  "Where  do  you 
think  it  came  from?"  and  "How  do  you 
think  it  was  made?"  implied 
possible  locations  and  processes  of  re- 
production. Thus,  if  the  children  in  Gard- 
ner's youngest  group  gave  responses 


70 


J.  Lovano-Kerr,  J.  Rush 


such  as  'factory,'  store,'  'school,'  or 
'you  pick  up  a  crayon  and  draw,'  it  is  a 
questionable  claim  that  these  children 
exhibited  misconceptions'  as  to  the 
identity  and  production  of  works  of  art. 
The  children's  responses  fall  within  a 
range  of  conceivable  answers,  and  if 
we  take  into  account  what  is  implicit 
in  the  questions,  they  do  make  sense 
...  To  conclude,  on  the  basis  of  the 
responses  alone,  that  the  selections  are 
functions  of  a  cognitive  stage  of  devel- 
opment is  unwarranted,  to  say  the  least 
(p.  98). 

Rosario  suggested  that  Project  Zero 
investigators  assumed  children  were 
correctly  interpreting  their  questions, 
and  as  a  result  they  expected  them  to 
demonstrate  the  same  kind  of  re- 
sponses adults  would  give;  when  they 
didn't,  their  answers  were  labeled  mis- 
conceptions. 

The  final  Project  Zero  documenta- 
tion of  children's  responses  to  art  de- 
scribes the  development  of  critical 
judgment  in  the  visual  arts  (Rosenstiel, 
Morrison,  Silverman,  &  Gardner,  1978). 
Interviewers  questioned  first-,  third-, 
sixth-,  and  tenth-graders  to  determine 
the  extent  to  which  children  of  different 
ages  can  distinguish  among  standards 
of  personal  preference,  community 
values,  and  technical  competence 
applied  to  painting  reproductions. 
This  study  exhibits  most  of  the 
characteristics  of  the  study  on  chil- 
dren's conceptions  of  the  arts  and, 
therefore,  contains  defects  similar  to 
those  we  have  already  described  re- 
garding the  nature  of  the  questions 
and  stimuli  used,  their  interpretations 
by  various  age  groups,  and  the  leap 
from  data  to  developmental  inferences 
and  pedagogical  recommendations. 
First-graders,  for  example,  had  diffi- 
culty discriminating  differences  among 
the  three  kinds  of  questions,  which 
suggests  some  misunderstanding. 

Most  art  criticism  models  stress  a 
broader  range  of  analyses  and  a  more 
objective  approach  than  that  used  by 
Project  Zero.  They  begin  with  observ- 
ing surface  qualities  of  artworks  and 


proceed  to  analyzing  and  interpreting 
formal  aspects  and,  finally,  to  evalu- 
ating or  making  critical  judgments. 
Hickey  (Note  2)  used  Feldman's  model 
to  determine  whether  children  aged 
five  to  fourteen  had  the  perceptual 
and  conceptual  abilities  necessary  to 
respond  appropriately  within  each  cat- 
egory (Description,  Formal  Analysis, 
Interpretation,  and  Evaluation).  Hickey 
derived  her  list  of  perceptual  and  cog- 
nitive abilities  from  the  research  of 
Piaget,  Bruner,  Arnheim,  and  Werner. 
She  found  that  children  with  no  prior 
training  in  art  appreciation  or  art  criti- 
cism possessed  these  abilities  in  vary- 
ing degrees  at  different  developmental 
levels.  Hickey  also  found  that  levels  of 
development  were  independent  of  age. 
These  results  and  conclusions  con- 
trast with  those  of  Rosenstiel  et  al., 
who  suggest  a  developmental  pattern 
and  who  believe  that  their  study  pro- 
vides normative  developmental  infor- 
mation with  educational  implications. 
Answering  the  questions  on  personal 
preference,  community  values,  and 
technical  competence  is  different  from 
making  critical  judgments;  yet  Rosen- 
stiel et  al.  generalize  from  the  former 
to  the  latter.  Their  rationale  here  seems 
tenuous  when  compared  to  other  seri- 
ous efforts  in  the  same  area. 

Making  Art 

Several  of  the  Project  Zero  publica- 
tions reviewed  dealt  with  the  artistic 
process  in  the  sense  of  creating  visual 
art  (Carothers  &  Gardner,  1979;  Gard- 
ner, 1980;  Rosenstiel  &  Gardner,  1977; 
Silverman,  Winner,  Rosenstiel,  &  Gard- 
ner, 1975;  Wolf  &  Gardner,  Note  3). 
Proect  Zero's  investigation  into  the 
creative  process  is  more  recent  and 
the  research  literature  therefore  less 
comprehensive  than  that  on  style  sen- 
sitivity. 

The  focus  of  Project  Zero  on  chil- 
dren's creative  growth  reflects  Gard- 
ner's developmental  orientation.  In 
Artful  Scribbles   (1980),  for  example, 


Project  Zero:  Evolution  of  Research        71 


Gardner  offers  a  picture  of  graphic 
development  similar  to  others'  obser- 
vations of  children's  drawing  (e.g., 
Golomb,  1977;  Goodnow,  1977;  Kel- 
logg, 1969;  Lowenfeld,  1947),  i.e.,  pro- 
ceeding from  scribbles,  through  man- 
dalas,  to  the  systematic  depiction  of 
entities  (tadpole  figures)  and  the  sub- 
sequent increase  of  expressiveness 
and  complexity  that  may  continue,  in 
some  cases,  throughout  adolescence 
into  adulthood.  Gardner  believes  that 
this  pattern  is  common  to  children  of 
all  cultures  and  that  intervention  can 
speed  up  or  slow  down  the  develop- 
mental process,  but  cannot  qualita- 
tively alter  the  basic  developmental 
sequence. 

Although  Gardner's  work  is  signifi- 
cant within  the  context  of  aesthetic 
education  as  well  as  artistic  develop- 
ment, these  two  areas  are  not  synony- 
mous. Gardner  prefers  basic  research 
(Gardner,  1977)  leading  to  "a  definition 
of  the  'end  state'  of  artistic  competence 
[and]  an  outline  of  developmental 
stages  culminating  in  such  compe- 
tence" (p.  31). 

Art  education  researchers,  on  the 
other  hand,  are  apt  to  value  the  effects 
on  the  developing  child  wrought  by 
experience,  especially  in  the  percep- 
tual and  motor  skills  peculiar  to  the 
creative  process  in  the  visual  arts.  Edu- 
cators strive  to  implement  the  aesthetic 
development  of  individuals  of  all  ages. 
In  their  view,  understanding  develop- 
mental patterns  may  prevent  inappro- 
priate intervention,  but  does  not  obvi- 
ate the  need  to  organize  effective 
experiential  patterns  to  implement,  en- 
hance, or  perhaps  even  alter  growth. 
Gardner's  education  goal  in  not  "to 
speed  up'  attainment  of  competency, 
but  rather  to  make  available  to  an  indi- 
vidual the  fullest  set  of  examples,  prob- 
lems, and  themes  for  which  he  will  be 
searching  at  a  particular  stage  in  de- 
velopment" (Gardner,  1977,  p.  34).  If 
a  person  without  language  instruction 
may  develop  into  an  illiterate,  a  person 
without  visual   arts   instruction   may 


grow  into  a  visual  illiterate.  Both 
camps  apparently  believe  that  without 
opportunities  to  exercise  creativity,  a 
child  may  become  an  adult  whose  de- 
velopmental potential  is  unrealized  (cf. 
McFee,  1970). 

In  Artful  Scribbles  Gardner  has  ver- 
bally and  visually  examined  the  char- 
acteristic graphic  images  that  children 
make,  from  their  first  manipulation  of 
marking  tools  through  adolescence. 
He  relates  these  manifestations  to 
other  developmental  traits,  thereby 
elucidating  visual  artistic  expression 
as  representative  childhood  behavior. 
Gardner's  studies  overlap  both  edu- 
cation and  psychology,  and  the  suc- 
cess of  his  publication  indicates  that 
many  practitioners  in  each  field  are 
unread  in  the  basic  literature  of  the 
other.  Gardner  correctly  sees  this  mu- 
tual ignorance  as  a  stumbling  block 
for  both  art  and  psychology  re- 
searchers. 

Gardner  seldom  cites  the  art  educa- 
tion literature  on  either  creating  or  re- 
sponding to  art,  although  a  consider- 
able amount  exists  that  is  related  to 
his  work,  some  of  it  quite  sophisti- 
cated. As  a  result  Gardner  appears 
either  unaware  of  or  disinterested  in 
many  contemporary  issues  in  the  pro- 
fession. Children's  artistic  growth  has 
been  discussed  frequently  during  the 
past  10  years  in  art  education  litera- 
ture. Studies  documenting  the  positive 
effects  of  instruction  on  the  art  per- 
formance of  children  as  young  as  two 
years  (Douglas  &  Schwartz,  1967;  Du- 
bin,  1946;  Kannegieter,  1971)  present 
a  different  viewpoint  from  Gardner, 
who  regards  the  natural  unfolding  of 
artistic  development  as  inviolable 
(Gardner,  1976b)  and  who  implies  that 
intervention  is  a  negative  influence. 

Gardner  and  his  colleagues  (Silver- 
man et  al.,  1975),  in  fact,  have  noted 
positive  effects  of  style  learning  on 
children's  drawings  in  such  formal 
aspects  as  color  and  texture  use. 
Rosenstiel  and  Gardner  (1977)  studied 
first-,  third-,  sixth-,  and  tenth-graders' 


72        J.  Lovano-Kerr,  J.  Rush 


performance  on  a  drawing  task  to 
ascertain  whether  an  observed  decline 
in  artistic  skills  during  childhood  might 
be  due  to  the  advent  of  formal  mental 
operations  in  adolescents,  specifically 
the  increase  in  their  critical  capabili- 
ties. Rosenstiel  and  Gardner  found 
that  older  children  who  viewed  more 
proficient  drawings  upon  completion 
of  their  own  first  drawing  took  more 
care  on  their  second.  Older  children 
often  evaluated  their  own  drawings  in 
a  negative  way,  even  though  their  com- 
petency (skill  level)  increased  with  age. 
The  authors  suggested  that  preadoles- 
cents  "do  not  receive  sufficient  intro- 
duction to  the  practice  of  constructive 
criticism,  and  that  the  'sudden  out- 
break' of  critical  awareness  cripples 
their  productive  output.  Should  this 
be  so,  it  would  seem  advisable  to  de- 
velop exercises  which  would  introduce 
subjects  gently  to  the  practice  of  criti- 
cism" (p.  42).  Yet,  because  of  the 
judged  decline  in  flavorfulness  during 
adolescence,  observed  also  in  two  ear- 
lier studies  of  children's  sensitivity  to 
musical  styles  and  children's  literary 
skills  (Gardner,  1973b;  Gardner  &  Gard- 
ner, 1971),  the  authors  hypothesized 
that  "artistic  sensitivity  may  attain  a 
high  point  in  our  society  in  the  pre- 
adolescent  years"  (p.  42).  This  con- 
clusion may  be  premature  given  the 
arbitrary  nature  of  the  criterion  (flavor- 
fulness),  the  training  effects  observed 
in  the  study,  and  the  little  evidence  to 
demonstrate  that  behaviors  character- 
istic of  one  art  form  will  generalize  to 
another. 

Making  Art:  Some  Critical 
Observations 

Studies  on  artistic  process  are  of 
great  interest  to  art  educators,  who 
are  above  all  committed  to  the  process 
they  teach.  The  core  of  visual  arts  edu- 
cation is  art.  Most  adults  in  our  so- 
ciety, uneducated  in  the  visual  arts, 
remain  visually  insensitive  to  some  de- 
gree to  the  formal  relationships  in  a 


work  of  art.  This  visual  illiteracy  ap- 
parently has  no  relation  to  their  intel- 
ligence or  educational  level,  although 
it  often  affects  their  preferences  for 
certain  art  objects.  Many  psychologists 
who  have  studied  the  visual  arts  have 
displayed  a  lack  of  sensitivity  to  the 
visual  material  with  which  they  dealt; 
this  impairment  has  affected  the  de- 
sign of  their  experiments  and  the  con- 
clusions drawn  from  them.  The  study 
published  recently  in  Developmental 
Psychology  by  Carothers  and  Gardner 
entitled  "When  Children's  Drawings 
Become  Art:  The  Emergence  of  Aes- 
thetic Production  and  Perception" 
(1979)  has  certain  weaknesses  in  this 
respect. 

In  this  experiment  children  com- 
pleted drawings  that  varied  along  two 
dimensions,  syntactic  repleteness  and 
expression  (metaphorical  exemplifica- 
tion), two  of  four  characteristics  iden- 
tified by  Goodman  (1968)  as  observ- 
able in  aesthetic  works.  The  children 
later  identified  correct  completions 
of  the  same  drawings  provided  by  the 
experimenter.  Carothers  and  Gardner 
measured  repleteness  according  to 
the  quality  of  line  used  to  indicate  the 
contour  of  a  form  within  a  picture 
(thick  vs.  thin  lines,  termed  brightness; 
varied  thickness  vs.  uniform  thickness 
of  lines),  and  the  kind  of  lines  used  to 
indicate  shading  of  a  form  within  a 
picture  (horizontal  bars  vs.  cross- 
hatching).  They  measured  expression 
according  to  whether  an  entire  picture 
expressed  (as  contrasted  to  repre- 
sented) either  the  emotion  of  happi- 
ness or  sadness. 

Carothers  and  Gardner  pointed  out 
in  their  introduction  that  "although 
all  drawing  occurs  in  an  artistic  me- 
dium, not  all  drawings  make  use  of 
the  fundamental  aesthetic  character- 
istics of  the  medium  and,  therefore, 
not  all  drawings  are  necessarily  works 
of  art"  (p.  570).  They  graphically  de- 
scribed a  replete  line  as  one  providing 
"the  outline  of  Mount  Fujiyama,  with 
every  variation   in  thickness,   bright- 


Project  Zero:  Evolution  of  Research        73 


ness,  and  shading  relevant  to  its  inter- 
pretation" (p.  571),  and  they  recognized 
that  a  drawing  of  a  person  who  looks 
sad  "need  not  express  sadness;  such 
an  expression  may  instead  be  con- 
veyed by  the  use  of  certain  colors 
(often  dark),  properties  of  line  (droop- 
ing), and  the  like"  (p.  571). 

Unfortunately,  Carothers  and  Gard- 
ner used  visual  materials  in  their  ex- 
periment that  exemplified  few  of  their 
verbal  observations.  They  elicited  chil- 
dren's production  or  perception  of 
repleteness  by  using  drawings  in  which 
the  lines  were  not  replete.  The  lines 
did  not  vary  in  thickness  or  thinness 
in  response  to  the  contour  that  they 
depicted,  but  were  merely  thick  or 
thin,  varied  or  uniform,  with  no  con- 
cern for  requirements  of  the  visual 
statement.  The  examples  of  shading 
exhibited  the  same  mistakes,  and  in 
addition  provided  other  misleading 
cues,  e.g.,  not  all  bars  in  the  pictures 
modeling  horizontal  bars  were  hori- 
zontal; some  were  vertical  and  some, 
oblique.  The  drawings  that  modeled 
expression  actually  represented  an 
emotion  of  happiness  or  sadness 
through  what  may  be  called  the  literary 
or  symbolic  aspect,  so  that  the  sun 
shone  in  a  cloudless  sky  in  the  happy 
picture,  but  in  the  sad  picture  the  sky 
was  filled  with  dark  clouds.  Neither 
the  happy  nor  the  sad  picture  ex- 
pressed an  emotional  content  through 
any  of  the  formal  elements  such  as  line, 
color,  compositional  variety,  or  so  on. 

All  of  the  drawings  used  in  Caroth- 
ers's  and  Gardner's  experiment  em- 
ployed obvious  visual  stereotypes.  None 
was  a  work  of  adult  art  and  none  was 
an  authentic  child's  drawing.  All  were 
noticeably  lacking  in  aesthetic  qual- 
ity. If  repleteness  and  expression  were 
present  in  these  drawings,  as  indicated 
by  the  authors,  they  cannot  be  sympto- 
matic of  aesthetic  quality.  On  the  other 
hand,  if  repleteness  and  expression 
were  not  present,  the  drawings  were 
inappropriate  stimuli  for  the  experi- 
ment described. 


Symbol  Use 

Symbol  development  and  use  by  the 
young  child  has  been  a  central  inter- 
est of  Project  Zero  from  the  onset;  the 
three  visual  arts  studies  on  this  sub- 
ject have  been  undertaken  fairly  re- 
cently, however.  Whereas  the  earlier 
series  of  cross-sectional  studies  on 
style  sensitivity  progressively  changed 
experimental  treatments,  the  studies 
on  symbol  formation  used  the  same 
experimental  tasks  for  different  pop- 
ulations (infancy  to  fifth  grade)  within 
both  cross-sectional  and  longitudinal 
structures.  The  first,  a  longitudinal 
study  of  five  first-born  infants,  is  still 
in  progress  and  results  are  unavailable 
(Gardner,  Wolf,  &  Smith,  1975).  The 
second  is  a  cross-sectional  study  of 
nursery  school  children  aged  21/2  to  5 
(Gardner,  1976a).  The  third  is  a  com- 
bined cross-sectional,  longitudinal 
study  of  children  initially  aged  5  to  8, 
who  were  subsequently  retested  for 
two  more  years  (Ives,  Silverman,  Kelly, 
&  Gardner,  1979). 

The  common  core  of  inquiry  in  the 
two  completed  symbol-development 
studies  consists  of  five  related  issues: 
simultaneity  of  symbol  system  emer- 
gence; the  order  of  emergence  and 
the  differences  and  factors  involved; 
the  universality  of  stages  in  symbol 
system  mastery;  the  factors  involved 
in  observed  wide  differences  in  sym- 
bol skill  and  preferences;  and  method- 
ological issues  regarding  the  identifi- 
cation of  specific  process  behaviors 
(Gardner,  1976a). 

Each  child  performed  four  tasks  for 
each  of  three  symbol  media  (language, 
drawing,  and  clay),  with  the  addition 
of  a  symbolic  play  task  for  children 
aged  21/2  to  5.  Each  child  produced  a 
spontaneous  product,  completed  a 
work  left  incomplete  by  the  experi- 
menter, assembled  a  work  from  several 
parts,  and  produced  "as  faithfully  as 
possible  a  work  or  performance  ex- 
hibited by  the  experimenter"  (Gard- 
ner et  al.,  1975,  p.  15).  The  spontane- 


74        J.  Lovano-Kerr,  J.  Rush 


ous  tasks  were  repeated  for  two  more 
years  with  children  who  were  initially 
tested  in  kindergarten,  first,  and  third 
grades  (Ives  et  al.,  1979). 

There  were  five  general  findings  for 
the  nursery  school  (2V2-  to  5-year-old) 
children  (Gardner,  1976a):  (1)  tremen- 
dous individual  differences  within  age 
groups;  (2)  sex  differences  in  media 
and  symbol  use;  (3)  an  improvement 
with  age  in  overall  flexibility;  (4)  an 
understanding  of  media,  task  situa- 
tion, and  the  capacity  to  elaborate; 
and  (5)  a  characteristic  approach  to 
tasks.  The  copying  task  produced  the 
most  anxiety,  while  the  assembly  task 
produced  the  least.  Fixed  themes  in 
children's  drawings  also  were  noted, 
such  as  Batman,  the  Yellow  Subma- 
rine, and  Oscar  the  Grouch.  Specula- 
tion regarding  this  phenomenon  was 
two-pronged:  on  the  one  hand,  the  re- 
turn to  a  familiar  theme  could  repre- 
sent a  necessary  element  in  artistic 
growth,  since  variations  could  be  ex- 
plored; on  the  other  hand,  fixed  themes 
could  be  inhibiting  for  some  children, 
preventing  further  explorations  and 
changes.  The  origins  of  the  fixed 
themes  were  not  discussed  by  the 
authors.  Perhaps  the  strong  influence 
of  popular  culture  on  children  at  very 
early  ages  is  a  given  and,  therefore, 
assumed  to  be  implicit  in  artistic  per- 
formance. 

Gardner  (1976a)  drew  implications 
from  the  study  of  nursery  school  chil- 
dren in  relation  to  the  five  focal  issues 
previously  identified.  He  found  that  a 
child's  symbol  system  often  did  not 
develop  simultaneously.  Moreover, 
each  level  of  symbol  use  seemed  to 
be  contingent  on  certain  prerequisites, 
which,  once  fulfilled,  generalized 
across  a  variety  of  media.  No  fixed 
order  of  symbol  emergence  was  evi- 
dent, and  mastery  of  individual  sym- 
bol systems  appeared  to  differ  notice- 
ably among  children.  Some  showed 
very  advanced  verbal  abilities  while 
others  of  the  same  age  seemed  to  pre- 
fer the  visual  and  design  features  of 


media  such  as  drawing.  These  striking 
differences  were  found  among  chil- 
dren as  young  as  two  and  three  years 
old. 

Patterns  of  consistent  behavior 
among  individual  children,  however, 
were  noted  across  tasks.  Assessment 
of  commonalities  and  individual  differ- 
ences found  in  this  study  required  the 
combining  of  two  divergent  psycho- 
logical constructs,  the  cognitive  and 
the  affective.  Accordingly,  children's 
products,  evaluated  for  technical  com- 
petence, were  categorized  on  the  basis 
of  developmental  level  or  mental  age, 
reflecting  the  view  of  the  cognitivist. 
The  affective  approach  was  used  to 
assess  the  distinctive  qualities  of  chil- 
dren's products  and  performance. 

Gardner  (1976a)  proposed  the  con- 
cept of  cognitive  style  to  account  for 
"the  particular  way  in  which  each 
child  realizes  the  universal  properties 
of  symbolization  at  his  level  of  devel- 
opment" (p.  18).  Specifically,  cognitive 
style  referred  to  patterns  of  symbol- 
ization behavior  of  children  described 
in  somewhat  dichotomous  terms.  Chil- 
dren identified  as  verbalizers  tended 
to  talk  more  than  to  produce  art  works; 
their  counterparts,  visualizers,  were 
active  producers  and  were  reluctant  to 
talk.  Self-starters  approached  tasks 
effortlessly;  completers  exhibited  anxi- 
ety when  first  starting  a  task,  but  not 
when  the  task  required  completion 
only.  The  person-centered  child  was 
more  socially  oriented  and  focused  on 
communication  and  used  figures  in 
graphic  expression;  the  object-cen- 
tered child  was  more  private  and 
tended  to  draw  objects  (physical  ele- 
ments, machines).  Gardner  used  the 
concept  of  cognitive  style  to  reconcile 
differences  between  universal  devel- 
opment stages  and  individual  behav- 
iors when  confronted  with  evidence 
from  the  nursery  school  study  that 
revealed  strikingly  individual  uses  of 
symbol  and  media  by  young  children 
at  the  same  age  and  level  of  skill.  The 
examination  of  the  relation  between  cog- 


Project  Zero:  Evolution  of  Research        75 


nitive  style  and  symbol  formation  and 
use,  if  extended  longitudinally  from 
preschool  through  the  elementary  and 
secondary  levels,  could  be  a  major 
contribution  to  the  literature  on  artistic 
development  and  a  valuable  extension 
of  Gardner's  developmental  model. 

A  move  in  this  direction  seems  to 
appear  in  the  third  study  on  symbol 
development  of  45  children  from  kin- 
dergarten, first,  and  third  grades  (Ives 
et  al.,  1979).  The  content  and  format 
of  these  experimental  tasks  were  iden- 
tical to  those  administered  to  pre- 
schoolers, except  for  the  elimination 
of  symbolic  play  and  the  addition  of 
a  retest  situation  in  which  the  same 
subjects  completed  the  spontaneous 
product  tasks  for  two  more  years. 
Each  product  was  assessed  on  the 
basis  of  competence  (skill  level),  flavor- 
fulness  (elaborative  and  expressive  use 
of  elements)  and  uniqueness  (unusual 
arrangements  and  embellishments). 

Symbolic  competence  increased  witn 
age;  the  rate  was  not  the  same  for  all 
ages,  however.  Different  developmen- 
tal patterns  appeared  in  each  art  form. 
Competence,  uniqueness,  and  flavor- 
fulness  in  storytelling  increased  stead- 
ily from  kindergarten  to  fourth  grade, 
showing  a  slight  decline  at  fifth  grade. 
This  pattern  was  not  found  in  drawing 
and  clay,  where  competence,  unique- 
ness, and  flavorfulness  increased  from 
kindergarten  to  first  grade  and  then 
declined  in  third,  fourth,  and  fifth 
grades  with  the  exception  of  drawing 
flavorfulness,  which  rose  slightly 
again  at  the  fifth  grade  level.  As  might 
be  expected,  the  level  of  self-confi- 
dence was  consistent  with  these  pat- 
terns. Initially  more  enthusiasm  was 
exhibited  on  nonlinguistic  tasks,  but 
the  level  of  enthusiasm  for  linguistic 
tasks  rose  steadily  from  kindergarten 
to  third  grade,  where  children  were 
more  enthused  with  storytelling  than 
with  drawing  and  clay.  Storytelling 
competence  correlated  significantly 
with  the  children's  Stanford  achieve- 
ment scores;  no  correlation  appeared 


between  achievement  scores  and  com- 
petence in  drawing  and  clay.  The  au- 
thors rejected  the  notion  of  a  unified 
semiotic  function  and  concluded  that 
"development  in  drawing  and  clay 
reaches  a  peak  around  first  grade  and 
then  begins  to  decline  as  children  pro- 
ceed through  elementary  school  and 
acquire  concrete  operational  think- 
ing" (p.  11). 

Symbol  Use:  Some  Critical 
Observations 

In  the  symbol-development  studies, 
mention  is  made  of  the  general  reli- 
ance on  language  for  communication 
at  the  elementary  level  in  contrast  to 
the  limited  use  of  visual  art  forms  as 
vehicles  for  communication,  although 
this  observation  is  not  reflected  in  the 
conclusions  drawn  by  Gardner  and  his 
associates.  Yet,  these  and  other  ef- 
fects of  educational  experiences  per- 
meate every  experimental  task.  The 
development  of  language  skills  is  an 
important  aspect  of  formal  educa- 
tion; language  skills  and,  hence,  con- 
fidence are  expected  to  increase  with 
age  and  grade.  This  expectation  has 
been  verified  in  Gardner's  studies  of 
symbol  development. 

Conversely,  the  development  of  art 
skills  is  not  a  major  goal  in  general 
education.  Curriculum  development 
lags  far  behind  that  of  other  subject 
areas.  Results  of  Gardner's  symbol- 
development  studies  reflect  this  dis- 
continuity, where  the  lack  of  progres- 
sive development  in  art  skills  contrasts 
greatly  with  the  progressive  skill  de- 
velopment in  language.  Any  analysis 
of  artistic  development  should  ac- 
count for  major  effects  of  education 
and  prior  experiences.  Experimental 
results  will  always  vary  in  accordance 
to  the  opportunity  children  have  to 
develop  art  skills,  as  indicated  in  a 
number  of  studies  on  this  topic 
(Brouch,  1971;  Gilliatt,  1980;  Gross- 
man, 1970;  Seefeldt,  1979;  Wilson, 
1966).  In  the  absence  of  a  standard- 


76 


J.  Lovano-Kerr,  J.  Rush 


ized  curriculum,  even  junior  and  senior 
high  school  art  programs  are  uniquely 
and  individually  designed.  Without 
such  continuity  and  sequence  as  ap- 
pears in  academic  subjects,  caution  is 
called  for  when  making  inferences 
about  developmental  levels  of  artistic 
growth. 

Also  absent  from  the  studies  on 
symbol  development,  as  well  as  from 
earlier  studies  on  aspects  of  artistic 
development,  is  reference  to  related 
theories  and  research  in  art  education. 
In  particular,  no  mention  is  made  of 
June  King  McFee's  Perception-Deline- 
ation (P-D)  Theory  (1970;  McFee  & 
Degge,  1977),  well-known  in  art  edu- 
cation and  used  frequently  as  the  basis 
for  inquiry  into  variables  influencing 
children's  artistic  development.  This 
organismic  theory  synthesizes  ele- 
ments of  many  disciplines,  among 
them  Gestalt  psychology,  association 
theory,  and  cultural  anthropology.  This 
integrative  aspect  and,  in  particular, 
some  of  the  postulates  accounting  for 
individual  differences  in  McFee's  P-D 
Theory,  are  also  found  in  the  writings 
of  Gardner  (i.e.,  cognitive  styles).  Mc- 
Fee, however,  includes  variables  in- 
volved in  the  effects  of  prior  experi- 
ences and  education  on  creating 
artistic  symbols  and  responding  to 
the  aesthetic  properties  of  art  objects. 

Cultural  Influences 

As  the  sphere  of  Gardner's  research 
widens,  so  does  his  perspective  on 
factors  influencing  artistic  develop- 
ment. Since  the  standard  developmen- 
tal framework  assumes  culture  to  be 
a  relatively  fixed  variable,  a  recent 
manuscript  by  Ives  and  Gardner  (Note 
4)  departs  from  the  traditional  stance 
by  viewing  culture  as  a  dynamic  and 
constantly  changing  set  of  influences 
that  effect  children  of  diverse  ages  in 
different  ways.  They  also  differ  in  their 
sensitivity  "to  the  particular  symbolic 
medium  in  which  knowledge  is  cap- 
tured and  conveyed"  (p.  5).  Their  re- 


search has  verified  that  "the  use  of 
different  media  and  their  underlying 
systems  involved  different  mental  op- 
erations" (p.  5). 

Ives  and  Gardner  have  attempted  to 
identify  developmental  trends  of  artistic 
symbolization  common  to  all  children. 
Universal  patterns  in  drawings  are 
ascribed  to  the  very  young.  Character- 
istic schemes  are  identified  at  each 
age  level  from  two  to  four  with  a  con- 
tinuation through  the  fifth  year.  Ac- 
cording to  the  authors,  cultural  in- 
fluences become  increasingly  more 
evident  in  drawings  after  age  five, 
peaking  between  seven  and  12  years 
of  age.  Although  older  children  are 
fluent  in  symbolic  capacity,  there  is  a 
"latency  stage"  as  they  come  to  draw 
less,  or  not  at  all.  Ives  and  Gardner 
identify  the  probable  cause  as  a  move 
toward  visual  realism  and  the  frustra- 
tion children  experience  when  their 
renderings  fall  short  of  their  expecta- 
tions. They  noted  a  continual  decline 
in  artistry,  especially  during  the  ado- 
lescent years,  apparently  associated 
with  the  rise  in  critical  faculties  of  the 
adolescent. 

The  authors  recognized  the  limita- 
tions of  their  overview,  since  much 
of  the  survey  was  "speculative  and 
programmatic  rather  than  summative 
and  conclusive"  (p.  24).  They  are  con- 
fident "that  individual  predispositions, 
genetic  potentials,  and  cultural  influ- 
ences should  interact  in  ways  which 
can  in  principle  be  specified"  (p.  24), 
although  we  are  still  far  from  knowing 
what  these  will  be.  This  is  a  welcome 
departure  from  a  methodological  limi- 
tation of  most  of  the  Project  Zero  re- 
search, their  lack  of  heterogeneous 
experimental  samples.  The  great  ma- 
jority of  the  children  studied  over  the 
past  10  years  were  drawn  from  middle 
class  suburban  schools,  a  selective 
population  that  in  no  way  reflects  the 
cultural  mix  prevalent  in  many  of  our 
public  schools.  Since  the  theoretical 
model  that  has  grown  from  Gardner's 
research  may  be  applied  in  other  cul- 


Project  Zero:  Evolution  of  Research        77 


tures,  its  underlying  limitations  could 
lead  users  to  believe  that  differences 
among  children  who  are  culturally  di- 
verse are  deviations  from  the  norm. 

The  recognition  of  cultural  influences 
on  artistic  development  is  another  issue 
being  addressed  and  evident  in  the 
recent  cross-cultural  literature  in  art 
education  (Anderson,  1979;  Eisner, 
1979;  Wilson  &  Wilson,  1979).  The  miss- 
ing links  in  many  of  the  earlier  cross- 
cultural  studies  and  in  the  Ives  and 
Gardner  overview  are  the  contextual 
factors  and  the  effect  of  prior  experi- 
ences and  education  on  the  drawings  of 
children.  Ives  and  Gardner  presented  a 
glimpse  of  possible  educational  effects 
by  citing  a  study  that  showed  high  per- 
formance of  Japanese  students  on  a 
visual  intelligence  test,  which  they  "at- 
tributed to  the  overall  emphasis  within 
the  culture  on  visual  expression"  (p. 
21). 

Cultural  Influences:  Some 
Critical  Observations 

A  major  concern  we  have  with  regard 
to  all  of  the  literature  reviewed  is  the 
pervasive  exclusion  of  prior  experi- 
ences, the  role  of  instruction,  and 
environmental  factors  as  variables  in 
determining  developmental  stages. 
Environmental  factors  can  modify, 
accelerate,  impede,  or  atrophy  growth, 
yet  culture  seldom  appears  as  a  vari- 
able in  the  studies  we  examined.  Cul- 
turally diverse  children  as  subjects 
for  comparative  analysis  are  noticeably 
absent.  Cross-cultural  perspectives  in 
determining  the  universality  of  devel- 
opmental stages  in  artistic  growth  are 
taken  from  existing  and  scattered 
sources,  a  weakness  noted  by  Gardner 
and  his  associates  also. 

Conclusion 

Project  Zero  and,  in  particular,  Gard- 
ner, have  made  a  major  contribution  to 
art  education  in  the  theoretical  realm. 


Gardner's  focus  on  the  integration  and 
extension  of  theories  to  explain  the 
developmental  process  of  artistic 
growth,  central  to  which  is  the  use 
and  understanding  of  symbols,  has 
received  increasing  attention  in  the 
field  of  art  education.  This  body  of 
work  has  an  internal,  logical  consis- 
tency; Gardner  articulates  it  into  a 
masterfully  integrated  whole. 

The  potential  of  this  theoretical  base 
for  illuminating  some  basic  issues  con- 
cerning artistic  growth  in  children 
holds  great  promise.  The  testing  of 
theory  is  the  basis  of  research.  The 
strength  of  this  inquiry  rests  on  the 
appropriateness  of  the  means  em- 
ployed to  test  the  experimental  hy- 
potheses. In  our  examination  of  the 
Project  Zero  literature,  we  have  found 
consistent  gaps  and  weaknesses  in 
Gardner's  translation  of  his  theory  into 
his  experimental  tasks,  which  has  led 
us  to  question  the  validity  of  some  of 
his  results. 

Project  Zero  offers  a  model  of  ten 
years'  continuous  and  focused  work 
to  the  rest  of  a  profession  whose  chief 
research  characteristic  is  a  scattering 
of  energy.  We  are  inspired  by  Project 
Zero's  productivity;  we  encourage 
them  to  continue  just  as  energetically 
in  the  future.  Whatever  imperfections 
we  can  observe  in  Project  Zero  in  no 
way  diminish,  in  our  view,  their  unique 
contributions  to  the  theoretical  and 
philosophical  bases  for  inquiry  in  art 
education;  they  only  point  up  the  fact 
that  Project  Zero  has  identified  and 
confronted  difficult  questions. 

Our  critique  of  Project  Zero  has 
raised  certain  issues  that  are  common 
to  all  visual  arts  research.  Let  us  now 
specify  10  goals  toward  which  we  all, 
as  researchers,  may  work. 

1.  We  must  be  truly  multidisciplinary 
when  we  design  our  research  and  se- 
lect methodology,  drawing  ideas  and 
resources  from  wherever  we  can.  First, 
let  us  read  widely;  perhaps  publishing 
integrated  literature  reviews  pertain- 


78 


J.  Lovano-Kerr,  J.  Rush 


ing  to  basic  areas  would  be  valuable. 
Second,  let  us  follow  Project  Zero's 
teamwork  example  and  undertake  co- 
operative research.  We  need  the  kind 
of  broad-ranging,  long-term,  sequen- 
tial research  that  only  many  people 
working  together  can  provide.  Let  us 
stop  thinking  of  research  as  an  indi- 
vidual activity  occurring  at  isolated 
universities.  Research  teams  could  con- 
tain people  from  a  number  of  schools 
and  laboratories  all  across  the  country. 

2.  We  must  pay  more  attention  to 
art  and  artists.  We  should  work  with 
people  who  have  sophisticated  art 
skills  if  we  do  not  have  them  ourselves. 
How  can  we  identify  the  artistically 
unique  without  expertise?  Only  the 
connoisseur  can  distinguish  the  excep- 
tional from  the  common. 

3.  We  must  improve  our  research 
designs  and  data  manipulations.  The 
visual  arts  offer  special  problems  in 
this  regard  because  of  the  complexity 
of  the  stimuli  and  nature  of  the  tasks 
involved. 

4.  We  must  account  for  the  features 
of  our  subject  populations.  We  should 
distinguish  the  effects  of  culture  and 
education  from  developmental  charac- 
teristics. In  this  process  let  us  examine 
people  from  diverse  walks  of  life. 

5.  We  must  scrutinize  our  experi- 
mental results  critically  and  interpret 
them  cautiously. 

6.  We  must  replicate  our  experi- 
ments and  those  of  others  to  verify 
our  results.  We  must  sequence  our 
experiments  toward  long-range  objec- 
tives. Both  may  be  done  by  more  than 
one  person  through  cooperative  re- 
search. 

7.  We  must  study  children's  per- 
ceptual abilities  that  relate  to  the 
visual  arts.  We  should  learn  to  recog- 
nize visual  concepts  and  how  they 
form.  We  should  look  at  what  all  of 
the  arts  have  in  common  and  how  they 
differ. 

8.  We  must  ask  the  same  questions 
of  adults  that  we  do  of  children.  We 


need  to  establish  parameters  of  adult 
behavior  in  the  arts  if  we  wish  to  under- 
stand children's  artistic  development. 

9.  We  must  study  learning  and  teach- 
ing, and,  in  the  process,  perhaps  reex- 
amine the  concepts  of  basic  and  ap- 
plied research.  We  need  to  know  how 
instruction  affects  artistic  behavior. 
We  need  to  improve  the  efficiency  of 
teaching.  We  need  to  understand  how 
education  interacts  with  development; 
let  us  select  subjects  for  developmen- 
tal research  who  have  participated  in 
ongoing  art  programs. 

10.  We  must  support  research  in 
the  visual  arts.  We  can  support  it 
with  our  money,  with  research  appoint- 
ments in  our  universities,  with  time 
released  from  teaching,  and  with  our 
recognition  that  research  is  a  legiti- 
mate occupation  for  artists  and  edu- 
cators. 

This  is  a  time  of  promise  in  our  ma- 
turing profession,  when  challenges 
are  great  and  so,  therefore,  are  the 
opportunities  for  creative  and  satisfy- 
ing work.  Good  research  raises  ques- 
tions; defining  problems,  as  Project 
Zero  has  done  over  the  last  decade, 
has  given  us  many  directions  for  imagi- 
native study.  The  future,  moreover, 
remains  for  all  of  us  to  shape. 

Reference  Notes 

1.  Rush,  J.  C.  &  Sabers,  D.  L.  The  percep- 
tion of  artistic  style.  Studies  in  Art  Edu- 
cation, in  press. 

2.  Hickey,  D.  The  development  and  testing 
of  a  matrix  of  perceptual  and  cognitive 
abilities  in  art  appreciation  and  criticism 
among  children  and  adolescents.  Unpub- 
lished doctoral  dissertation,  Indiana  Uni- 
versity, 1975. 

3.  Wolf,  D.  &  Gardner,  H.  Beyond  playing  or 
polishing:  A  developmental  view  of  ar- 
tistry. Unpublished  manuscript. 

4.  Ives,  S.  W.  &  Gardner,  H.  Cultural  influ- 
ences on  children's  drawings:  A  develop- 
mental perspective.  In  A.  Hurwitz  (Ed.), 
Art  education  international.  Pennsylvania 
State  University,  in  press. 


Project  Zero:  Evolution  of  Research        79 


References 

Anderson,  F.  E.  Approaches  to  cross-cul- 
tural research  in  art  education.  Studies  in 
Art  Education,  1979,  21  (1),  17-26. 

Arnheim,  Ft.  Visual  thinking.  Berkeley:  Uni- 
versity of  California  Press,  1969. 

Bengston,  J.  K.,  Schoeller,  J.,  &  Cohen,  S.  J. 
On  conceptualizing  an  artistic  style:  How 
critical  are  examples?  Studies  in  Art  Edu- 
cation, 1979,  20  (1),  49-55. 

Bloom,  K.  The  arts  in  education,  a  new  move- 
ment. In  N.  Shuker,  Arts  in  education  part- 
ners: Schools  and  their  communities.  New 
York:  Georgian  Press,  1977. 

Brouch,  V.  An  experimental  study  of  the 
effect  of  synchronized  slide-tape  learning 
experiences  on  the  tempera  paintings  of 
third  and  fourth  grade  children.  Studies 
in  Art  Education,  1971,  12  (3),  31-42. 

Carothers,  T.  &  Gardner,  H.  When  children's 
drawings  become  art:  The  emergence  of 
aesthetic  production  and  perception.  De- 
velopmental Psychology,  1979,  15  (5), 
570-580. 

DePorter,  D.  A.  &  Kavanaugh,  R.  D.  Param- 
eters of  children's  sensitivity  to  painting 
styles.  Studies  in  Art  Education,  1979,  20 
(1),  43. 

Douglas,  N.  &  Schwartz,  J.  Increasing  aware- 
ness of  art  ideas  of  young  children  through 
guided  experiences  with  ceramics.  Studies 
in  Art  Education,  1967,  8  (2),  2-9. 

Dubin,  E.  R.  The  effect  of  training  on  the 
tempo  of  development  of  graphic  represen- 
tation in  preschool  children.  Journal  of 
Experimental  Education,  1946,  15,  163- 
173. 

Eisner,  E.  W.  Cross-cultural  research  in  arts 
education.  Studies  in  Art  Education,  1979, 
21  (1),  27-35. 

Gardner,  H.  Children's  sensitivity  to  painting 
styles.  Child  Development,  1970,  41,  813- 
821. (a) 

Gardner,  H.  Effects  of  stimulus  rearrangement 
on  the  development  of  sensitivity  to  paint- 
ing styles.  Proceedings,  78th  Annual  Con- 
vention, APA,  1970.  (b) 

Gardner,  H.  The  development  of  sensitivity 
to  artistic  styles.  Journal  of  Aesthetics  and 
Art  Criticism,  1971,  29,  515-527. 

Gardner,  H.  The  development  of  sensitivity 
to  figural  and  stylistic  aspects  of  paint- 
ings. British  Journal  of  Psychology,  1972, 
63  (4),  605-615.  (a) 

Gardner,  H.  On  figure  and  texture  in  aes- 


thetic perception.  British  Journal  of  Aes- 
thetics, 1972,  12  (1),  40-59.  (b) 

Gardner,  H.  Style  sensitivity  in  children.  Hu- 
man Development,  1972,  15,  325-338.  (c) 

Gardner,  H.  The  arts  and  human  develop- 
ment. New  York:  Wiley,  1973.  (a) 

Gardner,  H.  Children's  sensitivity  to  musical 
styles.  Merrill-Palmer  Quarterly,  1973,  19, 
67-77. (b) 

Gardner,  H.  The  contribution  of  color  and 
texture  to  the  detection  of  painting  styles. 
Studies  in  Art  Education,  1974,  15  (3),  57- 
62. 

Gardner,  H.  On  the  acquisition  of  first  symbol 
systems.  Studies  in  the  Anthropology  of 
Visual  Communication,  1976  (3),  22-37.  (a) 

Gardner,  H.  Unfolding  or  teaching:  On  the 
optimal  approach  to  art  education.  In 
E.  Eisner  (Ed.),  The  arts,  human  develop- 
ment, and  education.  Berkeley,  CA:  Mc- 
Cutchan  Publishing,  1976.  (b) 

Gardner,  H.  Sifting  the  special  from  the 
shared:  Notes  toward  an  agenda  for  re- 
search in  arts  education.  In  S.  S.  Madeja 
(Ed.),  Arts  and  aesthetics:  An  agenda  for 
the  future.  St.  Louis:  CEMREL,  Inc.,  1977. 

Gardner,  H.  Artful  scribbles.  New  York:  Basic 
Books,  1980. 

Gardner,  H.  &  Gardner,  J.  Developmental 
trends  in  sensitivity  to  painting  style  and 
subject  matter.  Studies  in  Art  Education, 
1970,  12  (1),  11-16. 

Gardner,  H.  &  Gardner,  J.  Children's  liter- 
ary skills.  Journal  of  Experimental  Edu- 
cation, 1971,  39,  42-46. 

Gardner,  H.  &  Gardner,  J.  Developmental 
trends  in  sensitivity  to  form  and  subject 
matter  in  paintings.  Studies  in  Art  Edu- 
cation, 1973,  14,  52-56. 

Gardner,  H.,  Winner,  E.,  &  Kircher,  M.  Chil- 
dren's conceptions  of  the  arts.  Journal 
of  Aesthetic  Education,  1975,  9  (3),  60-77. 

Gardner,  H.,  Wolf,  D.  S.,  &  Smith,  A.  Artistic 
symbols  in  early  childhood.  New  York  Uni- 
versity Education  Quarterly,  1975,  VI  (4), 
13-21. 

Gilliatt,  M.  T.  The  effects  of  habituation,  the 
Feldman-Mittler  methodology,  and  studio 
activities  on  expanding  art  preferences  of 
elementary  students.  Studies  in  Art  Edu- 
cation, 1980,  21,  43-49. 

Golomb,  C.  Young  children's  sculpture  and 
drawing.  Cambridge,  MA:  Harvard  Uni- 
versity Press,  1977. 

Goodman,  N.  Languages  of  art  (Second  Ed.). 
Indianaplis,  IN:  Hackett,  1976. 


80 


J.  Lovano-Kerr,  J.  Rush 


Goodnow,  J.  Children  drawing.  Cambridge, 
MA:  Harvard  University  Press,  1977. 

Grossman,  M.  Perceptual  style,  creativity 
and  various  drawing  abilities.  Studies  in 
Art  Education,  1970,  11  (2),  51-54. 

Howard,  V.  A.  Harvard  Project  Zero:  A  fresh 
look  at  art  education.  Journal  of  Aesthetic 
Education,  1971,  5  (1),  61-73. 

Ives,  W.  S.,  Silverman,  J.,  Kelly,  H.,  &  Gard- 
ner, H.  Artistic  development  in  the  early 
school  years:  A  crss  media  study  of  story- 
telling, drawing  and  clay  modelling.  Tech- 
nical Report  #8,  Harvard  Project  Zero, 
Sept.  1979. 

Kannegieter,  R.  The  effects  of  a  learning  pro- 
gram in  activity  upon  the  visual  percep- 
tion of  shape.  Studies  in  Art  Education, 
1971,  12  (2),  18-27. 

Kellogg,  R.  Analyzing  children's  art.  Palo 
Alto,  CA:  National  Press,  1969. 

Knieter,  G.  &  Stallings,  J.  The  teaching  pro- 
cess &  arts  and  aesthetics.  St.  Louis: 
CEMREL,  Inc.,  1979. 

Lowenfeld,  V.  Creative  and  mental  growth. 
New  York:  Macmillan,  1947. 

Madeja,  S.  S.  (Ed.).  Arts  and  aesthetics:  An 
agenda  for  the  future.  St.  Louis:  CEMREL, 
Inc..  1977. 

Madeja,  S.  S.  (Ed.).  The  arts,  cognition,  and 
basic  skills.  St.  Louis:  CEMREL,  Inc.,  1978. 

McFee,  J.  Preparation  for  art.  Belmont,  CA: 
Wadsworth  Press,  1970. 

McFee,  J.  &  Degge,  R.  Art,  culture,  and  envi- 
ronment: A  catalyst  for  teaching.  Belmont, 
CA:  Wadsworth  Press,  1977. 

Murphy,  J.  &  Jones,  L.  Research  in  arts  edu- 
cation: A  federal  chapter.  Washington, 
D.C.:  U.S.  Department  of  Health,  Educa- 
tion, and  Welfare,  Office  of  Education, 
1976. 

National  Endowment  for  the  Arts.  Report 
of  the  task  force  on  the  education,  train- 
ing and  development  of  professional  ar- 
tists and  arts  educators.  Washington,  D.C., 
December,  1978. 

Perkins,  D.  N.  &  Gardner,  H.  Harvard  Project 
Zero:  Moving  from  zero  to  one.  Harvard 
Graduate  School  of  Education  Associa- 
tion Bulletin,  1974,  18  (2),  5-10. 

Perkins,  D.  N.  &  Leondar,  B.  The  arts  and 
cognition.  Baltimore,  MD:  Johns  Hop- 
kins University  Press,  1977. 

Rosario,  J.  Children's  conceptions  of  the 
arts:  A  critical  response  to  Howard  Gard- 
ner. Journal  of  Aesthetic  Education,  1977, 
11  (1),  91-100. 

Rosenstiel,  A.  K.  &  Gardner,  H.  The  effect  of 


critical  comparisons  upon  children's 
drawings.  Studies  in  Art  Education,  1977, 
19,  36. 

Rosenstiel,  A.  K.,  Morison,  P.,  Silverman,  J., 
&  Gardner,  H.  Critical  judgment:  A  devel- 
opmental study.  Journal  of  Aesthetic  Edu- 
cation, 1978,  12,95-107. 

Rush,  J.  C.  Acquiring  a  concept  of  painting 
style.  Studies  in  Art  Education,  1979,  20 
(3),  43-51. 

Schapiro,  M.  In  S.  Tax  (Ed.),  Anthropology 
today.  Chicago:  University  of  Chicago 
Press,  1972. 

Seefeldt,  C.  The  effects  of  a  program  de- 
signed to  increase  young  children's  per- 
ception of  texture.  Studies  in  Art  Educa- 
tion, 1979,  20  (2),  40-43. 

Silverman,  J.,  Winner,  E.,  &  Gardner,  H.  On 
going  beyond  the  literal:  The  development 
of  sensitivity  to  artistic  symbols.  Semi- 
otica,  1976,  18,  291-312. 

Silverman,  J.,  Winner,  E.,  Rosenstiel,  A.  K., 
&  Gardner,  H.  On  training  sensitivity  to 
painting  styles.  Perception,  1975,  4, 
373-384. 

Tighe,  T.  J.  Concept  formation  and  art:  Fur- 
ther evidence  on  the  applicability  of  Walk's 
technique.  Psychonomic  Science,  1968, 
12  (8),  363-364. 

Walk,  R.  D.  Concept  formation  and  art: 
Basic  experiment  and  controls.  Psycho- 
nomic Science,  1967,  9  (4),  237-238. 

Walk,  R.  D.,  Karusaitis,  K.,  Lebowitz,  C,  and 
Falbo,  T.  Artistic  style  as  concept  forma- 
tion for  children  and  adults.  Merrill- 
Palmer  Quarterly,  1971,  17  (4),  347-356. 

Wilson,  B.  G.  An  experimental  study  de- 
signed to  alter  fifth  and  sixth  grade  stu- 
dents' perception  of  paintings.  Studies  in 
Art  Education,  1966,  8  (1),  33-42. 

Wilson,  B.  G.  &  Wilson,  M.  Figure  structure, 
figure  action,  and  framing  in  drawings  by 
American  and  Egyptian  children.  Studies 
in  Art  Education,  1979,  21  (1),  36-43. 


Jessie  Lovano-Kerr 

School  of  Education 
Indiana  University 
Bloomington,  Indiana  47405 


Jean  Rush 

Department  of  Art 
University  of  Arizona 
Tucson,  Arizona  85721 


Project  Zero:  Evolution  of  Research 


81 


RESPONSE  TO  COMMENT  ON  PROJECT  ZERO  BY  JESSIE  LOVANO-KERR 
AND  JEAN  RUSH 


Howard  Gardner 
Harvard  Project  Zero 


I  am  grateful  to  Professors  Jessie 
Lovano-Kerr  and  Jean  Rush  for  the 
care  they  have  taken  in  examining 
some  of  the  work  undertaken  at  Project 
Zero  over  the  last  decade.  It  is  not  pos- 
sible, and  possibly  not  appropriate,  to 
respond  to  every  point  which  they 
raise.  Accordingly,  in  these  notes,  I 
will  limit  myself  to  some  points  of  clari- 
fication about  efforts  being  undertaken 
at  Project  Zero  and  to  some  correc- 
tions of  errors  of  fact. 

While  it  is  flattering  to  be  the  center 
of  attention  of  such  a  lengthy  review, 
and  to  read  the  favorable  comments 
dispensed  by  the  authors,  I  must  point 
out  that  Project  Zero  is  in  no  sense 
synonymous  with  the  work  of  myself 
and  my  immediate  colleagues.  The  Proj- 
ect was  founded  by  Nelson  Goodman,  a 
philosopher,  is  currently  co-directed  by 
David  Perkins,  a  mathematician  trained 
in  artificial  intelligence,  and  houses  at 
any  one  time  between  20  and  35  full- 
time  and  part-time  researchers  and  stu- 
dents. We  are  not  a  monolith  and  no  two 
members  of  the  Project  would  respond 
to  the  present  critique  in  the  same 
manner.  Moreover,  starting  from  that 
whimsical  Zero,  we  have  in  fact  changed 
our  thinking  on  nearly  all  points,  some- 
times slightly,  sometimes  dramatically. 
We  ourselves  have  questioned  nearly 
all  of  the  results  discussed  here  by 
our  critics.  What  has  not  changed, 
however,  are  our  beliefs  in  the  utility 
of  the  developmental  paradigm  and  in 
the  ways  in  which  experimental  studies 
in  aesthetics  should  be  framed  and 
executed. 

Following  the  example  of  Piaget, 
we  have  always  proceeded  by  outlin- 
ing  an   "end-state"   of  competence 


within  a  particular  artistic  realm,  de- 
vising tasks  which  make  it  possible  to 
examine  the  development  of  the  requi- 
site operations  across  a  range  of  ages, 
and  then  examining  how  this  ability 
emerges  in  a  sample  of  American  chil- 
dren. We  have  sought  to  use  stimuli 
which  are  as  close  to  "real"  works  of 
art  as  possible,  and  to  devise  ques- 
tions and  procedures  which  are  as 
natural  and  non-invasive  as  possible, 
while  at  the  same  time  employing 
proper  scientific  procedures  and  con- 
trols. While  we  have  not  worked  in 
elite  private  schools  or  in  urban  ghet- 
tos, our  sampling  has  been  quite 
broad  and  representative  within  the 
American  context. 

This  policy  has  yielded  a  program  of 
research,  including  certain  areas  of 
stress  and  certain  points  of  relative 
neglect.  We  have  deliberately  sampled 
a  wide  range  of  artistic  abilities,  rather 
than  focussing  just  on  one  or  two.  We 
have  steered  away  from  tasks  in  which 
one  set  of  subjects  might  be  much 
better  trained  or  informed  than  an- 
other. We  have  noted  sex  differences 
and  social  class  differences,  when 
appropriate,  but  have  not  for  the  most 
part  made  such  differences  the  center 
of  our  concern.  Nor  have  we  under- 
taken the  enormously  difficult  task  of 
trying  to  determine  the  exact  back- 
ground and  training  of  our  particular 
subjects.  (However,  following  standard 
experimental  practice,  we  have  sam- 
pled a  broad  range  of  subjects  so  that 
any  individual  differences  in  training 
should,  in  the  end,  "average  out.") 
Finally,  again  following  Piaget's  exam- 
ple, we  have  employed  tasks  which 
pose  genuine  difficulties  for  younger 


82 


subjects,  tasks  on  which  there  is  a  rea- 
sonable chance  that  they  will  fail, 
thereby  in  the  process  revealing  their 
presuppositions,  strategies,  and  world- 
views. 

What  we  hope  will  emerge  eventually 
from  this  program  is  an  overview  of 
how  a  certain  set  of  artistic  skills  de- 
velops within  the  American  context, 
in  the  absence  of  specific  training  regi- 
mens. In  other  words,  much  as  Piaget, 
Lawrence  Kohlberg,  and  William  Da- 
mon have  provided  baseline  develop- 
mental portraits  in  other  seminal  areas 
of  human  growth,  we  seek  a  first-order 
approximation  to  the  natural  develop- 
mental history  of  key  artistic  capaci- 
ties. Against  this  background,  it  should 
then  be  possible  to  ascertain  the  flexi- 
bility of  this  portrait,  the  differences 
which  background  and  training  can 
make,  the  effects  of  intervention  or  of 
a  highly  unusual  home  or  school  set- 
ting, the  role  of  individual  differences, 
and  the  like.  In  other  words,  first,  the 
approximation:  then  refinements,  al- 
terations or  possibly  even  the  scut- 
tling of  the  initial  model. 

It  is,  or  course,  possible  to  follow 
other  research  strategies  in  the  areas 
of  artistic  development  and  art  edu- 
cation. My  critics  seem  to  favor  an 
alternate  approach,  though  they  do 
not  spell  it  out.  They  obviously  feel 
that  contexts  and  training  are  impor- 
tant. I  agree.  But  I  must  question 
whether  our  scientific  understanding, 
or  even  our  non-scientific  understand- 
ing, would  be  much  enhanced  by  the 
kind  of  experimental  program  which 
they  appear  to  espouse. 

To  be  specific:  We  know,  without 
doing  any  more  studies,  that  training 
will  help  children.  Indeed,  if  it  does 
not,  we  simply  draw  the  conclusion 
that  the  training  program  was  no  good. 
By  the  same  token,  we  know  that  con- 
text influences  a  child's  behavior;  oft- 
times,  in  fact,  context  is  the  name  of 
the  game  in  educational  psychology. 
To  document  these  truisms  once  again 
is  a  waste  of  time.  What  seems  worth- 


while, however,  is  to  take  a  coherent 
model  of  the  child,  one  based,  for 
example,  on  developmental  studies, 
and  to  determine  the  effects  of  train- 
ing and  context  under  the  rubric  of 
such  a  model:  to  ascertain,  for  in- 
stance, which  contexts  work  best  at 
various  ages  and  stages,  which  ones 
have  relatively  little  effect,  which  yield 
the  best  short-term,  long-term,  me- 
dium-term gains,  and  the  like.  At  the 
risk  of  seeming  self-serving,  then,  I 
suggest  that  the  kind  of  research  ap- 
proach apparently  favored  by  my  critics 
makes  sense  when  undertaken  in  the 
wake  of  a  theory  or  a  model  of  artistic 
development,  but  not  before  and  not 
otherwise. 

So  much  for  philosophy  of  research. 
Most  of  Professors  Lovano-Kerr  and 
Rush's  paper  consists  of  a  set  of  criti- 
cisms, some  quibbles,  some  more  ex- 
tensive, of  research  undertaken  by  the 
developmental  group  at  Project  Zero. 
Any  study  has  flaws  and  ours  certainly 
are  no  exception.  Indeed,  we  under- 
take further  studies  in  an  effort  to  com- 
pensate for  flaws,  and  we  hope  that 
our  more  recent  research  (and  that  of 
others)  is  more  sophisticated  due  to 
our  recognition  of  earlier  mistakes  and 
insufficiencies.  Similarly,  it  should  be 
noted  that  we  have  followed  our  own 
precepts,  conducting  training  studies 
after  our  initial  baseline  studies  have 
been  carried  out,  and  that  our  views 
have  changed  as  a  result  of  the  train- 
ing studies.  This  seems  somewhat  dis- 
concerting to  our  critics,  who  seem  to 
prefer  that  we  not  dirty  our  hands  or 
our  publications  with  training  studies 
or  with  changes  of  mind,  but  I  am 
afraid  I  cannot  apologize  for  either 
practice. 

Of  the  various  criticisms,  the  one 
about  the  use  of  reproductions  in  our 
study  of  children's  conceptions  of  arts 
seems  most  valid  to  me.  Certainly  the  re- 
lation between  responses  based  upon 
"real  art  works"  and  responses  based 
upon  reproductions  deserves  study, 
and  I  hope  that  someone  will  undertake 


Response  to  Lovano-Kerr  and  Rush        83 


the  study  (although  it  is  not  as  easy  to  do 
as  it  might  at  first  seem).  I  would  only 
add  that  the  fact  that  we  obtained  es- 
sentially the  same  results  whether  we 
used  reproductions  or  slides,  and 
whether  we  questioned  children  about 
"paintings,"  poems,  or  songs,  makes 
it  unlikely  that  the  use  of  reproductions 
has  had  a  major  impact  on  our  results. 

At  a  few  points,  I  felt  that  my  critics 
were  being  disingenuous.  Thus,  when 
they  say  that  "lack  of  sensitivity  to  style 
seems  consistent  in  all  untrained  sub- 
jects despite  age,"  they  ignore  the 
obvious  points  of  difference  between 
lacking  the  concept  of  style  altogether 
(as  do  young  children)  and  having  the 
concept  but  being  unskilled  in  applying 
it  and  being  able  to  overlook  the  subject 
matter  of  the  artist  (as  do  the  older  sub- 
jects). By  the  same  token,  when  they 
criticize  the  stimuli  in  the  Carothers  and 
Gardner  study  for  lack  of  artistic  quality, 
they  deliberately  overlook  the  fact  that  it 
was  necessary  to  use  drawings  which 
would  not  intimidate  the  children  who 
had  to  complete  them,  and  which  had 
to  be  controlled  on  all  variables  save 
the  ones  being  examined  —  replete- 
ness  and  expressivity. 

There  were  a  few  times  in  the  paper 
where  I  felt  that  I  was  the  intended 
victim  of  a  hatchet  job,  and  here  I 
must  strongly  protest.  It  is  claimed  that 
"(this  pattern  of  artistic  development)  is 
common  to  children  of  all  cultures."  On 
pages  159-160  of  Artful  Scribbles,  I  dis- 
cuss the  cross-cultural  work  of  Alex- 
ander Alland  and  explicitly  consider  the 
possibility  that  "our  developmental 
norms"  are  limited  to  children  in  a  West- 
ern context  who  have  had  the  oppor- 
tunity to  draw  from  an  early  age.  It  is 
claimed  that  our  studies  document 
"lack  of  progressive  development  in  art 
skills,"  whereas  in  truth,  nearly  all  of  our 


studies  document  some  growth  in  artis- 
tic skills  and  some  of  them  actually 
document  the  effects  of  training. 
Finally,  and  most  annoyingly,  it  is 
asserted  that  I  regard  "the  natural  un- 
folding of  artistic  development  as  invio- 
lable" and  that  "intervention  is  a  nega- 
tive influence."  In  the  very  article  in 
which  I  am  alleged  to  hold  this  point  of 
view,  I  take  exactly  the  opposite  posi- 
tion: namely,  that  intervention  is  helpful 
and  necessary  after  the  pre-school 
years.  I  have  taken  this  position  in  the 
numerous  articles  I  have  written  on  the 
educational  aspects  of  artistic  develop- 
ment, and  in  my  chapter  on  the  subject 
in  Artful  Scribbles.  I  find  it  astonishing 
that  my  critics  could  attribute  this  posi- 
tion to  me,  unless  they  simply  find  it 
convenient  to  do  so. 

With  respect  to  the  charge  that  I 
ignore  art  educators  and  am  "either 
unaware  of  or  disinterested  (sic)  in 
many  contemporary  issues  in  the  pro- 
fession," I  plead  innocent.  I  am  in  favor 
of  interdisciplinary  exchange,  and  have 
sought  to  realize  this  orientation  at 
Project  Zero.  To  this  ecumenical  end, 
let  me  affirm  that  I  have  read  Professor 
Lovano-Kerr's  and  Rush's  Ten  Com- 
mandments of  Visual  Arts  Research, 
and  I  say,  Amen. 

I  am  grateful  to  the  Spencer  Foun- 
dation, the  Carnegie  Corporation,  the 
Markle  Foundation,  the  National  Sci- 
ence Foundation,  and  the  National 
Institute  of  Education  for  their  gener- 
ous support  of  the  work  undertaken 
at  Project  Zero. 


Howard  Gardner 

Harvard  Project  Zero 

Harvard  University 

Cambridge,  Massachusetts  02138 


84        Howard  Gardner 


Instructions  for  Authors 

Manuscripts  submitted  to  the  Review 
of  Research  in  Visual  Arts  Education 

should  include  an  original  and  three 
copies.  All  manuscripts  should  follow 
policies  outlined  in  the  Publication 
Manual  of  the  American  Psychological 
Association.  2nd  edition.  Please  send 
all  manuscripts  to: 

Editorial  Office 
143  Art  and  Design  Building 
4th  Street  and  Peabody  Drive 
University  of  Illinois 
Champaign.  Illinois  61820 


Art  Sinsabaugh,  Photograph 
Galena,  Illinois,  1959 

Courtesy  of  the  Art  Sinsabaugh  Archive,  Indiana  University  Art  Museum